Sony | RDR-HX910 | Sony RDR-HX910 تعليمات التشغيل

2-629-954-31(3)
DVD Recorder
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
RDR-HX710/HX910
© 2005 Sony Corporation
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﹼ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻓﻨﻴﲔ ﻣﺆﻫﻠﲔ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺍﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ )ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ( ﺇﻻ ﻟﺪ￯ ﳏﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﳐﺘﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﻨﻒ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‬
‫‪ .CLASS 1 LASER‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ ‪CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT‬‬
‫‪ MARKING‬ﻋﲆ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ ﺍﻻﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﴫﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻈﺮ ﹰﺍ ﻟﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻋﲈﻝ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺤﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﺆﻫﻠﲔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳍﻴﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﱰﺩﺩ ‪٢٤٠ – ٢٢٠‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٦٠/٥٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺤﲇ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳌﻨﻊ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺰﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻﺗﻀﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﳑﻠﻮﺀﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﲇ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Gemstar Development Corporation‬‬
‫‪G-CODE is a registered trademark of‬‬
‫‪Gemstar Development Corporation.‬‬
‫‪The G-CODE system is manufactured‬‬
‫‪under license from Gemstar‬‬
‫‪Development Corporation.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻭﺟﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﴩﻭﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ‪ EMC‬ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﴫ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺊ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺼﻪ ﻟﺪ￯‬
‫ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﻪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﲈ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﴎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﲈ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﳛﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻐﻨﻄﻴﺴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻷﻱ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﲑ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻋﲆ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ )ﺗﻐﲑ ﰲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻻﻳﻌﻤﻞ )ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﲨﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﱃ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﲣﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺤﺼﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫‪.Sony‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ‪.Sony‬‬
‫ﻛﲈ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﳏﻮ ﲨﻴﻊ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺑﲈ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲣﺎﻟﻒ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﱰﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﻇﻞ ﻣﺘﺼ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﻟﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﱰﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ؛ ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻄﻠﻘ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﱰﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻻﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ( ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﻭ ﲥﻮﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻟﲔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﲠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍﺓ‪ ،‬ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻐﻨﻄﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺨﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﲢﺖ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺖ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺑﲈ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻞ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻌﲇ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻷﺟﻞ ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻤﻰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﳋﻄﺮﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﳍﺎ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺯﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺧﺼﻴﺼ ﹰﺎ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺃﴍﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﲑﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻃﺒﻊ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳐﺎﻟﻔ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪ .‬ﻛﲈ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﲈﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﴫﳛ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﴩﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺒﺚ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﱰﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ .‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﴫﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪،Macrovision‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻥ ﲣﺼﺺ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﱄ ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺎﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ Macrovision‬ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﳛﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳍﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺆﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪.Sony‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺩﻳﻠﲔ‪ RDR-HX710 :‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ .RDR-HX910‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﳎﻬﺰ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﳍﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﳏﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ( ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﲤﺖ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﲇ ﺑﺈﺳﻢ "‪ "HDD‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻢ ”ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ“ ﻛﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﲑ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ ،HDD‬ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻜﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ CD‬ﻣﺎﱂ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﻏﲑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﳍﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﲈﺀ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﲈﺀ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﲠﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﴩﺡ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﴩﺡ ﻻﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﲢﺬﻳﺮ ‪٢ .............................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪٢ ........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪٧ ....................................................................................... DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪٨ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪٨ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪١٠ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪١٢ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪١٢ ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :1‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ ‪١٢ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪١٣ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :3‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪١٤ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪١٥ ....................................................................................PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :4‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪١٦ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :5‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪١٧ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :6‬ﲡﻬﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪١٨ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪١٨ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ( ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪١٩ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ Sony DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪٢٠ ...................................................Sony DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :7‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪٢١ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ‪٢٢ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ LINE IN 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪٢٢ .................................................................................. 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ LINE 2 IN‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪٢٣ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪٢٤ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ( ‪٢٥ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪٢٥ ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ(‪٢٥ .............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٢٧ ..............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪٢٨ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ( ‪٢٨ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٣١ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪٣٢ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ‪٣٣ ..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﲪﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ‪٣٤ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪٣٤ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪٣٥ ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVD‬ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ( ‪٣٥ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪٣٦ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ ‪٣٧ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪٣٧ ....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪٣٧ ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﱰﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪٣٨ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪٣٨ ....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ )ﻗﻴﺎﳼ‪/‬ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪٣٩ ...................................................................................(G-Code‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ )ﻗﻴﺎﳼ( ‪٣٩ ................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ‪٤١ .............................................................G-Code‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ‪٤٢ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٤٢ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﰲ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٤٣ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ( ‪٤٤ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ )ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ( ‪٤٥ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪٤٦ ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﺆﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ(‪٤٦ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪٤٧ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٤٩ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٤٩ .........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٥١ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٥٣ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪٥٤ .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ )ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ‪٥٤ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ )ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ‪٥٥ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﲔ( ‪٥٥ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ ‪٥٦ ...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﺮﺋﻲ( ‪٥٦ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٥٧ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪٥٨ ........................................................................ JPEG‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ‪٥٨ ...............................................................................................MP3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪٥٩ ............................................................................................JPEG‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٦٠ .................................................................JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ‪٦٠ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪٦١ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪٦٢ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪٦٢ .....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪٦٢ ..................................... (VR‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW/DVD+RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪٦٣ ....................DVD-R/DVD+R /‬‬
‫ﳏﻮ ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٦٣ ...............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﳏﻮ ﻓﺼﻞ )‪٦٤ ....................................................................................... (Delete Chapter‬‬
‫ﳏﻮ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )‪٦٤ ..................................................................................... (A-B Erase‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪٦٥ ................................................................................ (Erase Titles‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )‪٦٥ ..................................................................................................(Divide‬‬
‫ﳏﻮ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪٦٦ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﳏﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )‪٦٦ .......................................................................(Disc Map‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ ‪٦٧ .........................................................................................................‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‪٦٧ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪٦٨ .......................................................................(Change Order‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪٦٩ ......................................................................... (Combine‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪٦٩ ................................................................................... (Divide‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ y HDD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪٧٠ ...................................................... (DVD‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪٧٠ ......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ "‪٧٠ ..................................................................................................."Dub Mode‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪٧٢ ...........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )‪٧٢ .........................................................................................(Title Dub‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪٧٣ ...................................................................... (Dub Selected Titles‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٧٥ ................................................................................... DV‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٧٥ ................................................................................................... DV‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٧٥ ....................................................................................... DV‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪) DV‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪٧٧ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪٧٨ ...................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪٨٠ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ )‪٨٠ .............................................................................. (Settings‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪٨٠ .................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ )ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ(‪٨٣ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪٨٣ .....................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪٨٤ ....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪٨٥ .....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪٨٥ ................................................................................................ (Video‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪٨٧ ................................................................................................ (Audio‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ )‪٨٩ .......................................................................... (Features‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪٩١ ...................................................................(Options‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ( ‪٩٢ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ‪٩٣............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻱ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ‪٩٣ ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ ) ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪/‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ‪٩٨ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ‪٩٩ ........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪١٠٠ ....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ‪١٠١ ................................................................................................................i.LINK‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪١٠٢ .................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪١٠٦ ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪١٠٨ ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪١٠٨ ....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪١٠٩ .......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫– ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫<‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫– ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫<‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﲔ‬
‫<‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫» ‪ .3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ( « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫» ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ )ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪DATA CD DATA DVD‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫» ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﲔ( «‬
‫ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫– ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫<‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪HDD‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪y HDD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪(DVD‬‬
‫<‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﴩﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪DV‬‬
‫– ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪DV‬‬
‫<‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫» ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٦٧‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫» ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ y HDD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ « (DVD‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫» ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ « DV‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻏﲑ ﴐﻭﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪HDD‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD+RW‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪+VR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD+RW‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪) VR‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ VR‬ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻏﲑ ﴐﻭﺭﻱ(‬
‫‪-RWVideo‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﴐﻭﺭﻱ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ )ﺩﺍﺧﲇ(‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬‫‪RW‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD+R‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪DVD+R DL‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﴐﻭﺭﻱ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD-R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﴐﻭﺭﻱ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺷﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ‪(٢٠٠٥‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ×‪ ٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ×‪ ٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﺍﻻﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪،1.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1.2‬ﻣﻊ ‪(١*CPRM‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD+R‬ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ×‪ ١٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-R‬ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ×‪ ١٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﺍﻻﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪،2.0‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(2.1‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD+R DL‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ( ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ×‪٢٫٤‬‬
‫"‪"DVD+R DL" ،"DVD+R" ،"DVD-RW" ،"DVD+RW‬ﻭ‬
‫"‪ "DVD-R‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪) CPRM ١‬ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ( ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﲑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻲ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ ×‪ ٤‬ﻭ×‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٩‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ‪16:9‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺇﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪A-B‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ*‪٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ*‪٤‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ*‪٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ*‪٤‬‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫• ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-R‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ ‪ HSP ،SP ،LSP‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HQ‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪ "DVD Rec. Picture Size‬ﺇﱃ "‪."16:9‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻻﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﰲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﴍﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺟﲑﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪VIDEO CD‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ CD-RW/CD-R‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪/VIDEO CD‬‬
‫‪ VIDEO CD‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ CD-RW/CD-R‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﴍﺍﺅﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪DATA DVD‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪DATA DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪/DVD-RW/DVD+R/DVD+RW‬‬
‫‪ DVD-ROM/DVD-R‬ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪DATA CD‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪DATA CD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ CD-RW/CD-R/CD-ROM‬ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪/DVD+RW‬‬
‫‪/DVD-RW‬‬
‫‪ ٨ DVD-R‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ CD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫—‬
‫"‪ "DVD VIDEO‬ﻭ "‪ "CD‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪PHOTO CD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ CD-RW/CD-R/CD-ROM‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺤﻜﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ Video CD‬ﺃﻭ ﻻﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪CD-Extra‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-ROM‬ﻻﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﰲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD-RAM‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ‪ HD‬ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ CD‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD-R ،DVD-RW ،DVD+RW‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫)ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪(.DVD‬‬
‫• ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١١‬‬
‫• ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-R‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) VR‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ*‬
‫‪٣٠٠‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪DVD-R/DVD-RW‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪DVD+R/DVD+RW‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪DVD+R DL‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪/DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO CD‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪/DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻤﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻲ ﺍﻟﱪﳎﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮ ﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪/DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺻﻤﻤﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﳎﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪/DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪.VIDEO CD‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ )ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD VIDEO‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﳊﲈﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ALL‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪"Playback prohibited by region code.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳏﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﳏﻈﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪RDR–XXXX‬‬
‫‪00V 00Hz‬‬
‫‪NO.‬‬
‫‪0-000-000-00‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻜﻤﺔ )‪ .(CD‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻃﺮﺣﺖ ﺣﺪﻳﺜ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﴍﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻜﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫* ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﴡ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻮ ‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫‪00W‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﲔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﲔ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﳎﺔ )‪ ،(CD‬ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﲈﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪،DVD+R/DVD+RW‬‬
‫‪ DVD-R/DVD-RW‬ﺃﻭ‪ CD-R/CD-RW‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫ﳖﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺧﻠﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ .DVD-RW‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﳏﻮ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲥﻴﹺﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﴅ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪."For Video‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-R ،DVD+R‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﲤﺖ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ DVD+RW‬ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﲤﺖ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVD‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪،DVD+RW‬‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ DVD+R ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD-R‬ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVD‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﳏﻮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 7‬ﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﲑ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﲑ ﳎﻬﺰ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :1‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‬
‫ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺳﻠﻚ ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ ‪ y ٣‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ ‪(١) (٣‬‬
‫• ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ )‪(١‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪(١‬‬
‫• ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪(١‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪) R6‬ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(٢) (AA‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :2‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ » ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :5‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪LINE IN‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪LINE OUT‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪~ AC IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪AERIAL IN‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪AERIAL‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪PCM/DTS/MPEG‬‬
‫‪DOLBY DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪AERIAL‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪AERIAL OUT‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪:‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﱃ ‪ AERIAL IN‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ AERIAL OUT‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :3‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﲈﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ A‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ C‬ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﳌﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ ‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(PR/CR ،PB/CB ،Y‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﺤﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ ،625p/525p‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ PROGRESSIVE‬ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ « PROGRESSIVE‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٥‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪) S-video‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫)ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪(S VIDEO) LINE OUT‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪(VIDEO) LINE OUT‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪LINE IN‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪LINE OUT‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫)ﺃﺧﴬ(‬
‫)ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫)ﺃﲪﺮ(‬
‫‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO IN‬‬
‫)ﺃﺧﴬ(‬
‫)ﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬
‫)ﺃﲪﺮ(‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪PCM/DTS/MPEG‬‬
‫‪DOLBY DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪~ AC IN‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪AERIAL‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪:‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ » ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ «‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ PROGRESSIVE‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪.B‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ PROGRESSIVE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳜﺮﺟﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ C‬ﰲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "PROGRESSIVE‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ‬‫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬‫‪.COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﴩﻃﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ LINE IN‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻻﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻏﲑ‬‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫)‪ VIDEO) LINE OUT‬ﺃﻭ ‪.((S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٦‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :4‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﲈﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ B‬ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﳌﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻳﴪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﲈﻋﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﱰﻳﻮ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ( ﳋﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﲑﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﲇ‬
‫• ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﱰﻳﻮ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‪ :‬ﻗﻴﺎﳼ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﲇ‬
‫‪ B‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ( ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪ ،٢*DTS ،١*Dolby Digital‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ MPEG‬ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﲑﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ ‪ ٥٫١) Dolby Digital‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ(‪ ٥٫١) DTS ،‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ( ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ ٥٫١) MPEG‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫)ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‬
‫)ﺃﲪﺮ(‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫)ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫)ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫)ﺃﲪﺮ(‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫)ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(*‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪LINE OUT‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪(R-AUDIO-L) LINE OUT‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪LINE IN‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪LINE OUT‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪AERIAL‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪PCM/DTS/MPEG‬‬
‫‪DOLBY DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪~ AC IN‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪ COAXIAL) DIGITAL OUT‬ﺃﻭ ‪(OPTICAL‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﺤﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫)ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫]ﺳﲈﻋﺎﺕ[‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﻳﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﻳﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫ﳎﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪PCM/DTS/MPEG/‬‬
‫‪DOLBY DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﴫﻱ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﴫﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫]ﺳﲈﻋﺎﺕ[‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﻳﴪ￯(‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﻳﴪ￯(‬
‫ﻭﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫‪:‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫*ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻻﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٤‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ‪ AC IN‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺻﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺿﺎﰲ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٢‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﲤﺎﻡ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪ (R-AUDIO-L) LINE IN‬ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻣﺰﻋﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،A‬ﻻﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪(R-AUDIO-L) LINE IN‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ (R-AUDIO-L) LINE OUT‬ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻣﺰﻋﺠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺳﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،B‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫"‪ "Audio Connection‬ﰲ "‪) "Easy Setup‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢١‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﺎﺧﺐ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،B‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﲑﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺍ ﻣﺼﻨﻌﻪ ﺑﺘﴫﻳﺢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻰ‪.‬‬
‫�ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻰ� ﻭﻋﻼﻣﻪ ﺩ ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﻪ ﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻰ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ "DTS" ٢‬ﻭ "‪ "DTS Digital Out‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Digital Theater Systems, Inc.‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :5‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪~ AC IN‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪AC IN‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﱄ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :6‬ﲡﻬﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﲔ ‪) R6‬ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ (AA‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪#‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﲔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻪ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ( ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻓﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪TV/DVD‬‬
‫‪]/1‬‬
‫–‪PROG +/‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪Sony DVD‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫• ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﴪﺏ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﻳﺘﲔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﴪﺏ ﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺎﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﴩﻛﺎﺕ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﴪﺏ ﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﳑﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﻗﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫–‪2 +/‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪t TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪-/- - ،SET‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﻟﻖ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ TV/DVD‬ﺇﱃ ‪.TV‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ‪."/1‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﴩﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ» ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ « ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﺭ ‪.'/1‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ TV/DVD‬ﺇﱃ ‪ ،TV‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪'/1‬‬
‫–‪) 2 +/‬ﻣﺘﺴﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫–‪PROG +/‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪TV/DVD‬‬
‫‪]/1‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫–‪2 +/‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ( ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ Sony‬ﺫﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬
‫‪t TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ‪،SET‬‬
‫‪*-/--‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ -/--‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﲡﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﴩﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ‬
‫‪Sony‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫‪) 01‬ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪Aiwa‬‬
‫‪) 01‬ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪Grundig‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪Hitachi‬‬
‫‪72 ،24 ،23‬‬
‫‪Loewe‬‬
‫‪45 ،06‬‬
‫‪Panasonic‬‬
‫‪49 ،17‬‬
‫‪Nokia‬‬
‫‪Philips‬‬
‫‪Saba‬‬
‫‪73، 69 ،16 ،15‬‬
‫‪72 ،45 ،23 ،08 ،07 ،06‬‬
‫‪75 ،74 ،43 ،36 ،13 ،12‬‬
‫‪Samsung‬‬
‫‪72 ،71 ،23 ،22 ،06‬‬
‫‪Sanyo‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫‪Sharp‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪Telefunken‬‬
‫‪75 ،74 ،43 ،36 ،13 ،12‬‬
‫‪Thomson‬‬
‫‪75 ،74 ،43 ،13 ،12‬‬
‫‪Toshiba‬‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫‪LG‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪JVC‬‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ( ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺯﻟﻖ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ TV/DVD‬ﺇﱃ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ‪ ،'/1‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﳌﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ( )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﺭ ‪.'/1‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ –‪) 2 +/‬ﻣﺘﺴﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺯﻟﻖ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ TV/DVD‬ﺇﱃ ‪.TV‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ TV/DVD‬ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃ ﹰﺎ ﺇﱃ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ‪) 90‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻀﺨﲈﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﲡﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﴩﻛﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ‬
‫‪Sony‬‬
‫‪Denon‬‬
‫‪Kenwood‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫‪91 ،80 ،79 ،78‬‬
‫‪86 ،85 ،84‬‬
‫‪93 ،92‬‬
‫‪Onkyo‬‬
‫‪83 ،82 ،81‬‬
‫‪Pioneer‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫‪Sansui‬‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫‪Technics‬‬
‫‪98 ،97‬‬
‫‪Yamaha‬‬
‫‪،96 ،95 ،94‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
.ENTER ‫ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬،"Options" ‫ﺇﺧﱰ‬
3
SETUP
Settings
Format DVD-RW :
VR
Video
HDD Bilingual Rec. :
Main
Audio
DVD Bilingual Rec. :
Main
Features
Dimmer :
Normal
Options
Power Save :
Off
Auto Display :
On
Command Mode :
DVD3
Easy Setup
Factory Setup
.ENTER ‫ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬،"Command Mode" ‫ﺇﺧﱰ‬
4
‫ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬Sony DVD ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
Sony DVD ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﻣﻮﺟﻪ‬،‫ ﺁﺧﺮ‬Sony DVD
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﺇﱃ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
.‫ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‬Sony DVD
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﳼ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ‬
.DVD3 ‫ﻫﻮ‬
SETUP
Settings
Format DVD-RW :
VR
Video
HDD Bilingual Rec. :
Main
Audio
DVD Bilingual Rec. :
Main
Features
Dimmer :
Normal
Options
Power Save :
Command Mode :
Factory Setup
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Off
DVD1
On
Auto Display :
Easy Setup
1
DVD2
DVD3
DVD3
،(DVD3 ‫ ﺃﻭ‬DVD2 ،DVD1) ‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
.ENTER ‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬COMMAND MODE ‫ﺇﺯﻟﻖ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
.‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﱰﺗﻪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬
SYSTEM MENU
5
6
،M/m
ENTER
O RETURN
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
.O RETURN ‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
COMMAND
MODE
‫ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ‬DVD3 ‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﳌﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬.‫ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﻻﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬،DVD2 ‫ ﺃﻭ‬DVD1 ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﱃ‬
.‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
.SYSTEM MENU ‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
1
.ENTER ‫ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬،"SETUP" ‫ﺇﺧﱰ‬
2
.‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
SETUP
Settings
Channel Setting
Video
Channel List
Audio
TV Guide Page
Features
Clock
Options
Language
Easy Setup
٢٠
‫‪TV Type‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ."16:9‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﳼ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﺇﻣﺎ "‪"4:3 Letter Box‬‬
‫)ﻳﻨﻜﻤﺶ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ( ﺃﻭ "‪) "4:3 Pan Scan‬ﻳﻤﺘﺪ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﳛﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ » ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ « ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :7‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﰲ "‪."Easy Setup‬‬
‫–‪PROG +/‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪O RETURN‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ "‪."Easy Setup‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ "‪."Finish‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪]/1‬‬
‫‪Audio Connection‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﴫﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﺤﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪ "Yes: DIGITAL OUT‬ﻭﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.O RETURN‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ( ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ ،MPEG‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "MPEG‬ﺇﱃ "‪) "MPEG‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪ "Easy Setup‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Easy Setup‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫"‪ "SETUP‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Easy Setup‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫"‪ "SETUP‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫"‪ »)"Easy Setup‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(٨٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪OSD‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Tuner System‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "ELSE-English‬ﺑﴫﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٠‬‬
‫‪Clock‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ </M/m/,‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪ LINE IN‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ DV IN‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪) DV‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪) (i.LINK‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٧٥‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ LINE IN 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪ LINE IN 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪،S-video‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ‪ S-video‬ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‬
‫‪OUTPUT‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪S-video‬‬
‫)ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪LINE IN‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪ LINE IN 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪LINE IN‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪LINE OUT‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪PCM/DTS/MPEG‬‬
‫‪DOLBY DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﲤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﱪ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪~ AC IN‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪AERIAL‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﴍﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴩﺍﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺛﺎﻥ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ LINE 2 IN‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ LINE 2 IN‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪S-video‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ‪ S-video‬ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪OUTPUT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪S-video‬‬
‫)ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪LINE 2 IN‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ )‪ L (MONO‬ﻭ ‪ VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ‪.R‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ (VIDEO) LINE IN‬ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ ‪.S-video‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻵﺧﺮ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺗﻐﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ .LINE IN 1‬ﺇﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺎﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪LINE OUT‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪LINE OUT‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪LINE IN‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪LINE OUT‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪~ AC IN‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪AERIAL‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪PCM/DTS/MPEG‬‬
‫‪DOLBY DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪LINE IN 1‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪LINE IN‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪OUTPUT‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﴐﻭﺭﻱ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫» ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ( « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.٤٦‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ(‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲥﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﴬﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،DVD-RW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨‬‬
‫‪DATA CD DATA DVD‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪) Z‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﻏﻠﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺇﲡﺎﻩ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪) Z‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﻏﻠﻖ( ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﲣﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪ "LOAD‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻐﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ(‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫‪Close‬‬
‫‪Stop‬‬
‫‪Erase‬‬
‫‪Protect‬‬
‫‪Dubbing‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ(‪ .‬ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ ،"Disc Info‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(VR‬‬
‫‪Disc Information‬‬
‫‪Close‬‬
‫‪DiscName Movie‬‬
‫‪Disc Name‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪Protect Disc‬‬
‫‪Finalize‬‬
‫‪Erase All‬‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪SP : 1H00M‬‬
‫‪EP : 2H00M‬‬
‫‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫‪Media‬‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫‪Original 3 / Playlist 2‬‬
‫‪Title no.‬‬
‫‪13.10.2005 ~ 28.10.2005‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪HSP : 0H45M‬‬
‫‪LP : 1H30M‬‬
‫‪SEP : 4H00M‬‬
‫‪HQ : 0H30M‬‬
‫‪Remainder LSP : 1H15M‬‬
‫‪SLP : 3H00M‬‬
‫‪2. 3 / 4. 7GB‬‬
‫‪) "Disc Name" 1‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ :"Media" 2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ :"Format" 3‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ :"Off"/"On" 4‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ :"Title no." 5‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ :"Date" 6‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻭﺃﺣﺪﺛﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‬
‫)ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪"Remainder"/"Continuous Rem. Time" 7‬‬
‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ(‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﴍﻳﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫"‪) "Disc Name‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫"‪) "Protect Disc‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫"‪) "Unfinalize"/"Finalize‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫"‪) "Erase All‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫"‪"Format‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Format‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،DVD-RW‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "VR‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫"‪ ،"Video‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﲨﻴﻊ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ DVD-RW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻭ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) Disc Map‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ‪) GB١ ،‬ﺗﻌﻨﻲ » ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﺖ «( ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﲈ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺃﻛﱪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﲈ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻛﱪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫–‪PROG +/‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ x REC STOP‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﲢﺖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪t TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻣﺘﻼﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X REC PAUSE‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﲢﺖ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪) t TV/VIDEO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ ‪Teletext‬‬
‫‪X REC PAUSE‬‬
‫‪x REC STOP‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪z REC‬‬
‫‪REC MODE‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ –‪ PROG +/‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ REC MODE‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫‪LSP‬‬
‫‪LP‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪EP‬‬
‫‪HSP‬‬
‫‪SLP‬‬
‫‪HQ‬‬
‫‪SEP‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ *Teletext‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﲥﺎ )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﻳﻮﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ Teletext‬ﻭﳛﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺈﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ « ﰲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٣‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Teletext‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Teletext‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ t TV/VIDEO‬ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ )‪ (HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫)‪ .(DVD‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z REC‬‬
‫* ﻏﺎﻟﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻷﳖﺎ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﰲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺍﺕ )ﺩﻳﻜﻮﺩﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،z REC‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﺤﻰ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٧‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ(‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪،M/m‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪H/X/x‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫» ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ ،"Display List‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪ORIGINAL‬‬
‫‪4.3 / 4.7GB‬‬
‫‪AAB‬‬
‫‪(0H30M) LSP 0.9GB‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪12 Tennis‬‬
‫‪Fri 28.10. 2005 13:00‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪11 Travel‬‬
‫‪DEF‬‬
‫‪Wed 26.10. 2005 20:00 (0H30M) SEP 0.3GB‬‬
‫‪AAB‬‬
‫‪(1H00M) SLP 0.8GB‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﴍﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﱄ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻﺗﺴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﲑ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.M/m‬‬
‫‪10 Mystery‬‬
‫‪Tue 25.10. 2005 9:00‬‬
‫‪GHI‬‬
‫‪Wed 19.10. 2005 20:00 (1H00M) SEP 0.6GB‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﳑﺘﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻃﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ORIGINAL‬‬
‫‪4.3 / 4.7GB‬‬
‫‪Play Beginning‬‬
‫‪ORIGINAL‬‬
‫‪4.3 / 4.7GB‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪AAB Fri‬‬
‫‪Tennis‬‬
‫‪DEF Wed 26.10‬‬
‫‪Travel‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪AAB Tue‬‬
‫‪Mystery‬‬
‫‪GHI‬‬
‫‪World Sports‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪17.10‬‬
‫‪DEF Mon‬‬
‫‪Family‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪25.10‬‬
‫‪15.10‬‬
‫‪Sat‬‬
‫‪L3‬‬
‫‪Nature‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪14.10‬‬
‫‪Fri‬‬
‫‪GHI‬‬
‫‪News‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪13.10‬‬
‫‪Thu‬‬
‫‪L3‬‬
‫‪Weather‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪Wed 19.10‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪ HDD ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺃﺻﲇ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(VR‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻻﲨﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪Fri 28.10. 2005 13:00‬‬
‫‪11 Travel‬‬
‫‪Erase‬‬
‫‪DEF‬‬
‫‪SEP 0.3GB‬‬
‫)‪Wed 26.10. 2005 20:00 (0H30M‬‬
‫‪Protect‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪28.10‬‬
‫‪12 Tennis‬‬
‫‪Close‬‬
‫‪AAB‬‬
‫‪Play LSP 0.9GB‬‬
‫)‪(0H30M‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺒﲔ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪) z‬ﺃﲪﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﳏﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫"‪) "NEW‬ﺃﻭ ‪ :(N‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺣﺪﻳﺜ ﹰﺎ )ﱂ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪HDD‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫"‪) "Copy-Once‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(٧٢‬‬
‫‪AAB‬‬
‫‪Dubbing‬‬
‫‪Visual Search‬‬
‫)‪(1H00M‬‬
‫‪SLP 0.8GB‬‬
‫‪Title Name‬‬
‫‪10 Mystery‬‬
‫‪Tue 25.10. 2005 9:00‬‬
‫‪9 World Sports‬‬
‫‪Delete ChapterGHI‬‬
‫‪SEP 0.6GB‬‬
‫)‪Wed 19.10. 2005 20:00 (1H00M‬‬
‫‪A-B Erase‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Play‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.x‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﱃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫‪9 World Sports‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪/HDD‬ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪(VR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫"‪ "Original‬ﺃﻭ "‪ ،"Playlist‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪HDD‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ « (VR‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٦٢‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ ."Sort Titles‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ M/m‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻔﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻭﱂ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ( )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪/HDD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TITLE LIST‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Set Thumbnail‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X ،H‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ m/M‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "TITLE LIST‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺳﲈﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ "*"‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ Dolby Digital ٥٫١ :‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪DATA CD DATA DVD CD‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﻳﴪ￯‪/‬ﻳﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪) LFE‬ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﻳﴪ￯‪/‬ﻳﻤﻨﻰ( ‪ +‬ﻭﺳﻄﻰ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪TIME/TEXT‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ T ١‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ T ٢‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ*‪/١‬ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﴍﻳﻂ‬
‫‪Title 1‬‬
‫‪1 : English DolbyDigital 2/0‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪.CD/DVD‬‬
‫‪1 : English DolbyDigital 3/2.1‬‬
‫)‪Angle3(5‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺇﺳﻢ‪/‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫)ﻳﺒﲔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻜﻤﺔ ‪ ،CD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪،VIDEO CD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DATA DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪(.DATA CD‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‪،‬‬
‫‪/‬ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‬
‫‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DATA DVD‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DATA CD‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ*‪) (٣‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫)ﻳﺒﲔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ*‪ ٣‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻜﻤﺔ ‪ ،CD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ،VIDEO CD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DATA DVD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪(.DATA CD‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻜﻤﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،CD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DATA DVD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ DATA CD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TIME/TEXT‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ*‪(٣‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "‪،"SVCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DATA CD‬ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "‪ ،"CD‬ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ DATA DVD‬ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "‪."DVD‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻻﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،VIDEO CD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DATA DVD‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪.DATA CD‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TIME/TEXT‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "DTS‬ﺇﱃ "‪ "Off‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ ،"Audio‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ‪ DTS‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪) DTS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Auto Display‬ﺇﱃ "‪) "On‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪) "Options‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٩٢‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ "*"‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TIME/TEXT‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪VIDEO CD‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪CD‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﻧﺺ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) CD‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﰐ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻸﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ CD‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ "*"‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ </M/m/,‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪Input Title Name :‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﻢ ﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺣﺮﻓ ﹰﺎ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﲇ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﻑ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺇﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Input Title Name‬‬
‫"‪"a‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪Clear All‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪Space‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪Finish‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪SET‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺇﺧﱰﲥﺎ ﰲ "‪."Easy Setup‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺣﺮﻓ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺇﺧﱰ "`'' ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ "‪ "a‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "‪."à‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Space‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 5‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪Input Title Name‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Title Name‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ </M/m/,‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻳﻤﲔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﱰ "‪) "A‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﲑ(‪) "a" ،‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﻐﲑ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ "‪ ،"Symbol‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫"‪"A‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫"‪"a‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪Symbol‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪Clear All‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪Space‬‬
‫‪Finish‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫"‪"A‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Symbol‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﳊﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻳﻤﲔ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﰲ ﺻﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Back‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ ﺇﱃ ﻳﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﳊﺬﻑ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Clear All‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Finish‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Cancel‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ "‪."D‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ٣‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ "‪."F‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SET‬ﻭﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻭﲪﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Finish‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪CLEAR‬‬
‫ﳌﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ "‪) "A‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﲑ(‪) "a" ،‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﻐﲑ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫"‪ "Symbol‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ‪.INPUT SELECT‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ ،"Disc Info‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(VR‬‬
‫‪Disc Information‬‬
‫‪Close‬‬
‫‪DiscName‬‬
‫‪Disc Name‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪Protect Disc‬‬
‫‪Finalize‬‬
‫‪Erase All‬‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪SP : 1H00M‬‬
‫‪EP : 2H00M‬‬
‫‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫‪Media‬‬
‫‪Original 3 / Playlist 2‬‬
‫‪Title no.‬‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫‪13.10.2005 ~ 28.10.2005‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪HSP : 0H45M‬‬
‫‪LP : 1H30M‬‬
‫‪SEP : 4H00M‬‬
‫‪HQ : 0H30M‬‬
‫‪Remainder LSP : 1H15M‬‬
‫‪SLP : 3H00M‬‬
‫‪2. 3 / 4. 7GB‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Disc Name‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫"‪) "Input Disc Name‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٣‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤٦‬ﺣﺮﻓ ﹰﺎ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ .DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVD‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ »ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ« ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ ،"Disc Info‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪Disc Information‬‬
‫‪Close‬‬
‫‪DiscName‬‬
‫‪Disc Name‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪Protect Disc‬‬
‫‪Finalize‬‬
‫‪Erase All‬‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪SP : 1H00M‬‬
‫‪EP : 2H00M‬‬
‫‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫‪Media‬‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫‪Original 3 / Playlist 2‬‬
‫‪Title no.‬‬
‫‪13.10.2005 ~ 28.10.2005‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪HSP : 0H45M‬‬
‫‪LP : 1H30M‬‬
‫‪SEP : 4H00M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﴐﻭﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﲠﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVD‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪،DVD+RW‬‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،DVD+R ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،DVD-R‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪HQ : 0H30M‬‬
‫‪Remainder LSP : 1H15M‬‬
‫‪SLP : 3H00M‬‬
‫‪2. 3 / 4. 7GB‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Protect Disc‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Protect‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Don't Protect‬ﰲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﲡﻬﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺼﲑ ﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫ﳖﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻏﲑ ﴐﻭﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.VR‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،VR‬ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﲡﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺼﲑ ﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﳖﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﴐﻭﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﲑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﲥﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٢٥‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﳏﻮ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﴐﻭﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﲑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﳍﺎ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ‬
‫ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﺡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVD‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫"‪."This disc was finalized. Unfinalize it.‬‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ ،"Disc Info‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪."Disc Information‬‬
‫‪About xx min is needed for finalizing this disc.‬‬
‫‪Cannot cancel finalizing during transaction.‬‬
‫?‪Do you want to finalize‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺎﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "Finalize‬ﰲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳎﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﳍﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Finalize‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Finalize‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ ،"Disc Info‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪."Disc Information‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Unfinalize‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﴫﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﲈ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVD‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻪ ‪ ٨‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪SP‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ LP‬ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ .(HQ‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﰲ )‪ (SEP‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺣﺘﲈ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻗﴡ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻮ ‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ REC MODE‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪RDR‬‬‫‪HX710‬‬
‫‪) HQ‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪HSP‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪) SP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﳼ(‬
‫‪*DVD‬‬
‫‪RDR‬‬‫‪HX910‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪LSP‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪LP‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫‪EP‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫‪٢١٧‬‬
‫‪SLP‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪٢٠٤‬‬
‫‪٣٢٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٢٦٩‬‬
‫‪٤٢٨‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪) SEP‬ﻓﱰﺓ ﳑﺘﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨‬‬
‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﲠﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ ،HDD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD+RW‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،DVD-RW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫• ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﴬﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‬
‫* ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD+R DL‬ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ( ﻫﻮ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :HQ‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ :HSP‬ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ٤٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣ :SP‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٣٧‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤ :LSP‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٣١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥ :LP‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٢٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ٧ :EP‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ١٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٠ :SLP‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٥١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٤ :SEP‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ "‪"HQ+‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ HQ‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ .HDD‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "HQ Setting‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫" ‪ "Features‬ﺇﱃ "‪) "HQ+‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٩٠‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﴡ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ ‪ ٢١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ RDR-HX710‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ .RDR-HX910‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "HQ‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﰲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﰲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺗﻢ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫‪ -‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﱰﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺴﱰﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺘﲈﺩ ﹰﺍ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ZWEITON‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.NICAM‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(VR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ ،HDD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Main" ،"Sub‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "Main+Sub‬ﰲ‬
‫"‪ "HDD Bilingual Rec.‬ﻋﲆ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪"Options‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW ،DVD+RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ DVD+R ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ DVD-R‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪ "DVD Bilingual Rec.‬ﺇﱃ "‪) "Main‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫"‪ "Sub‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪) "Options‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪) ZWEITON‬ﺃﳌﺎﲏ ﺳﱰﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﱰﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪."Stereo‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪ ،ZWEITON‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ"‪،"Main‬‬
‫"‪ "Sub‬ﺃﻭ "‪."Main/Sub‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪ ،NICAM‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫"‪ "NICAM‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،NICAM‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Audio‬ﰲ‬
‫"‪ "Channel Setting‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ "‪ "Settings‬ﺇﱃ "‪"NICAM‬‬
‫)ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺚ‬
‫‪ ،NICAM‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Audio‬ﺇﱃ "‪) "Standard‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫» ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٠‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﳏﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪(*CPRM) -RWVR‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ(‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ CPRM‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ )ﻗﻴﺎﳼ‪/‬ﺷﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫‪(G-Code‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[TIMER‬‬
‫‪Timer - Standard‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫]‪[TIMER‬‬
‫‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫‪x REC STOP‬‬
‫‪Update Off‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪G-Code‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ "‪ ،"Timer – G-Code‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ <‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﱃ "‪."Standard‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ </,‬ﻭﺇﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪.M/m‬‬
‫"‪ :"Date‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫‪Thu 28.10 y ...... y Tomorrow y Today‬‬
‫)ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( ‪) Sun y‬ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ( ‪y ...... y‬‬
‫‪) Sat‬ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﺒﺖ( ‪) Mon-Fri y‬ﺍﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳉﻤﻌﺔ(‬
‫‪) Mon-Sat y‬ﺍﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ( ‪) Sun-Sat y‬ﺍﻻﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺖ( ‪Today y‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ )ﻗﻴﺎﳼ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Media Mode‬‬
‫‪Prog.‬‬
‫‪Stop‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪Today‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﳎ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺷﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.G-Code‬‬
‫• ﻗﻴﺎﳼ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪ :G-Code‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ‪ G-Code‬ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٤١‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Details‬‬
‫‪Set the timer manually.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Start‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Stop‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Prog.‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Media‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫"‪ :"Mode‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٧‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪"Details‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪</,‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.M/m‬‬
‫"‪) "Update‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺒﻮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﺧﱰ "‪"Previous‬‬
‫ﻭ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٤٤‬ﻳﻀﺊ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ‪TIMER REC‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﹰﺍ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﴐﻭﺭﺓ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Extend Rec. Time‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.x REC STOP‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻀﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‪ TOOLS ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Rec Mode Adjust‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪"Off‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻠﺖ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫‪Timer‬‬
‫?‪These timer settings overlap. Do you want to continue‬‬
‫‪Wed 29.10 21:00-22:00 AAB DVD SP‬‬
‫‪Wed 29.10 20:30-22:00 DEF DVD SP‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ."OK‬ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﲏ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Cancel‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ( «‬
‫ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٤‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪Set the timer extend function.‬‬
‫‪DVD SP‬‬
‫‪Wed 28.9 10:00-11:30 AAB‬‬
‫‪Extend Time‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ‬
‫"‪."On‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪،"Extend Rec‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ M/m‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺑﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻗﴡ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﲑ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪/HDD‬‬
‫‪ DVD-RW/DVD+RW‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺚ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺩﻉ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺒﻮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ " " ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪ "Auto Title Erase‬ﺇﱃ "‪."On‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ‪G-Code‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ‪ G-Code‬ﻫﻮ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ‪ G-Code‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ‬
‫"‪ "Channel Setting‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪) "Settings‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(٨٠‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪Timer - G-Code‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪Details‬‬
‫‪Change‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪AAB‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Update:‬‬
‫‪22 : 00‬‬
‫‪21 : 00‬‬
‫‪Wed 28.9‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ </,‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ M/m‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪ "Details‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪SET ،‬‬
‫]‪[TIMER‬‬
‫‪Is the following timer setting correct? To modify,‬‬
‫‪adjust each item or re-enter the timer code.‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪Stop‬‬
‫‪Prog. Media Mode‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ‪ ،G-Code‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Change‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺊ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ‪ TIMER REC‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪z REC‬‬
‫‪x REC STOP‬‬
‫ﺇﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.x REC STOP‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻀﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻠﺖ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[TIMER‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪Timer - G-Code‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪Set the timer by entering the timer code.‬‬
‫‪G-Code No.‬‬
‫‪Standard‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ( «‬
‫ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٤‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٠‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪ ،"Timer – Standard‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ <‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﱃ "‪."G-Code‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ‪،G-Code‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.SET‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CLEAR‬ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻓﱰﺍﺕ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z REC‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻗﴡ ﻓﱰﺓ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ ٦‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪6:00‬‬
‫‪5:30‬‬
‫‪1:00‬‬
‫‪0:30‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪ ،0:00‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ(‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ z REC‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ ،"Rec Settings‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪Rec. Settings‬‬
‫‪Select the item you want to change.‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪Rec Mode :‬‬
‫‪4:3‬‬
‫‪HDD Rec. Picture Size:‬‬
‫‪4:3‬‬
‫‪DVD Rec. Picture Size:‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Rec NR :‬‬
‫‪Rec Video Equalizer‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪Rec NR :‬‬
‫‪Rec NR‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫"‪ :"Rec Mode‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٧‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫"‪/"HDD Rec. Picture Size‬‬
‫"‪ :"DVD Rec. Picture Size‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) 4:3‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫• ‪ :16:9‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ‪) ١٦:٩‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Auto‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﲇ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫"‪) "Rec NR‬ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫"‪ :"Rec Video Equalizer‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ M/m‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫• ‪ :Contrast‬ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :Brightness‬ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :Colour‬ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﱪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﰲ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Auto Chapter‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Features‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫"‪) "Off‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫"‪ "DVD Rec. Picture Size‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ DVD-R‬ﻭ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪ SP ،HSP ،HQ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .LSP‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﲆ "‪."4:3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،(VR‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﲇ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﴫﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ،١٦:٩‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١٦:٩‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪ "DVD Rec. Picture Size‬ﺇﱃ "‪."4:3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،DVD+R/DVD+RW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﲆ "‪."4:3‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺣﺘﻮ￯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﲆ ﺣﺠﻤﲔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ ١٦:٩‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ‪ ،١٦:٩‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "‪."Rec NR‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﺆﺛﺮ "‪ "Rec Video Equalizer‬ﻋﲆ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ DV IN‬ﻭﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪.COMPONENT VIDEO IN‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﲑﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ‪ ٦‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٧٠‬ﻻﲢﻔﻆ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻳﻮﺿﻊ ﲢﺘﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ‪.‬‬
‫"‪) :"Rec NR‬ﺿﻌﻴﻒ( ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪) 3 ~ 2 ~ 1‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫"‪:"Rec Video Equalizer‬‬
‫• ‪) :Contrast‬ﺿﻌﻴﻒ( ‪) 3 ~ 0 ~ – 3‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫• ‪) :Brightness‬ﺩﺍﻛﻦ( ‪) 3 ~ 0 ~ – 3‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫• ‪) :Colour‬ﻓﺎﺗﺢ( ‪) 3 ~ 0 ~ – 3‬ﺩﺍﻛﻦ(‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ ‪ ٣‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺃﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫‪.HDD‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪TIMER LIST‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺘﻪ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻩ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫"‪ :"Modify‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ </,‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.M/m‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Details‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫‪Modify‬‬
‫‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪O RETURN‬‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﴍﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﱄ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻﺗﺴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﲑ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.M/m‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TIMER LIST‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪Details‬‬
‫‪Modify the timer setting.‬‬
‫‪Prog. Media Mode‬‬
‫‪AAB‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Update:‬‬
‫‪22 : 15‬‬
‫‪22 : 00‬‬
‫‪Mon-Sat‬‬
‫"‪ :"Erase‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﱰ "‪،"OK‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Erase‬‬
‫‪TIMER LIST‬‬
‫‪10:30‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪22:00-22:15 AAB‬‬
‫‪Mon-Sat‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪29.10 20:30-21:30 DEF‬‬
‫‪Fri‬‬
‫‪SLP‬‬
‫‪29.10 21:00-22:00 GHI‬‬
‫‪Fri‬‬
‫‪SLP‬‬
‫‪Sat 30.10 16:00-17:00 DEF‬‬
‫?‪Are you sure you want to erase this timer setting‬‬
‫‪AAB‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻠﺖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺧﴬ(‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) z‬ﺃﲪﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) a‬ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ :‬ﻳﺒﲔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪Stop‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪Mon-Sat 22:00-22:15‬‬
‫‪HDD SP‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫"‪ :"Check Overlap‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Check Overlap‬‬
‫‪These timer settings overlap.‬‬
‫‪DVD SP‬‬
‫‪DEF‬‬
‫‪20:30-21:30‬‬
‫‪29.10‬‬
‫‪Fri‬‬
‫‪DVD SLP‬‬
‫‪GHI‬‬
‫‪21:00-22:00‬‬
‫‪29.10‬‬
‫‪Fri‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TIMER LIST‬ﺃﻭ ‪.O RETURN‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Close‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﲏ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪9:00‬‬
‫‪10:00‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺃﺧﲑ ﹰﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﲤﺖ‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ‪B‬ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ،A‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ‪.A‬‬
‫‪9:00‬‬
‫‪10:00‬‬
‫‪8:00‬‬
‫‪7:00‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪10:00‬‬
‫ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ )ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪9:00‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺒﻮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ " " ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪7:00‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﲤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫‪Close‬‬
‫‪8:00‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﱃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ، /‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TIMER LIST‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪،"Auto Title Erase‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"On‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ "‪."Off‬‬
‫‪7:00‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫‪SELECT‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ(‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ LINE IN 1‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪.LINE IN 1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪، </M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫‪REC PAUSEX‬‬
‫‪REC STOPx‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪REC MODE‬‬
‫‪SYNCHRO‬‬
‫‪REC‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Synchro Rec‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪ "Features‬ﺇﱃ "‪ "Record to HDD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫"‪) "Record to DVD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ INPUT SELECT‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪."L1‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(VR‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪،"Line Audio Input‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Bilingual‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ REC MODE‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.SYNCHRO REC‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺊ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ‪ SYNCHRO REC‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ »ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﳑﺎﺛﻞ« ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٢٢‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪ DV IN‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪) DV‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪.(i.LINK‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ x REC STOP‬ﺃﻭ ‪.SYNCHRO REC‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.SYNCHRO REC‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ‪ SYNCHRO REC‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﴫﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.SYNCHRO REC‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪SYNCHRO REC‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻠﺖ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ INPUT SELECT‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫‪DV‬‬
‫‪L3‬‬
‫‪L2‬‬
‫‪L1‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(VR‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪،"Line Audio Input‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Bilingual‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٨‬‬
‫ﺑﴫﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﲈ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﲏ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪10:00‬‬
‫‪9:00‬‬
‫‪8:00‬‬
‫‪7:00‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﲏ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ REC MODE‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X REC PAUSE‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﴍﻳﻂ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻭﺇﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X REC PAUSE‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ x REC STOP‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪DV IN‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ « DV‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪.DV IN‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٢‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺓ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪DATA CD DATA DVD‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫–‪PROG +/‬‬
‫‪INPUT‬‬
‫‪SELECT‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ‪ .3‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ( « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪4.3 / 4.7GB‬‬
‫‪AAB‬‬
‫‪(0H30M) LSP 0.9GB‬‬
‫‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪12 Tennis‬‬
‫‪Fri 28.10. 2005 13:00‬‬
‫‪11 Travel‬‬
‫‪DEF‬‬
‫‪Wed 26.10. 2005 20:00 (0H30M) SEP 0.3GB‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪AAB‬‬
‫‪(1H00M) SLP 0.8GB‬‬
‫‪SUR‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪ORIGINAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ ‪ ،CD‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ .H‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪10 Mystery‬‬
‫‪Tue 25.10. 2005 9:00‬‬
‫‪9 World Sports‬‬
‫‪GHI‬‬
‫‪Wed 19.10. 2005 20:00 (1H00M) SEP 0.6GB‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪TOP MENU‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Play‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫>‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪CM‬‬
‫‪mc‬‬
‫‪H/X/x‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW ،DVD+RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ DVD+R ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ DVD-R‬ﺗﻢ ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ TOP MENU‬ﺃﻭ ‪.MENU‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪PBC‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) ،PBC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ VIDEO CD‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ،PBC‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ H‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫"‪.("Press SELECT‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ PBC‬ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.x‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ‪ M‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫‪ ،HDD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫"‪.("×1.5‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ M‬ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﴎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ )ﺇﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻟﻔﻚ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ x‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪ "UNLOCKED‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ‪ H‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.x‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ ،"Play Beginning‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .ENTER‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.(HDD‬‬‫ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.(HDD‬‬‫ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬‫‪/HDD‬ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪CD/ VIDEO CD/‬‬‫‪ DATA CD/ DATA DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪/HDD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬‫‪ DVD-RW‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(VR‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪.MP3‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻮﺩﻋﺮﺽ )ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪"Do you want temporarily change parental‬‬
‫"?* ‪control to‬‬
‫)ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﺇﱃ *؟( ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﴪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻤﻚ ﺍﻟﴪﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪."OK‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﴪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ )ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ( «ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٩‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺄﻣﲔ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﳌﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ x‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫"‪ "LOCKED‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪) Z‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﻏﻠﻖ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ H‬ﰲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪) 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٤٩‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻞ ﺗﺄﻣﲔ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺧﱰﺕ "‪ "Factory Setup‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪) "Options‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪DVD -RWVR HDD‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪ : DVD‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ : -RWVR HDD‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪ : CD‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ( ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪) SUR‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ(‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫" ﰲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪ￯ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ‪ TVS‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ‪) *TVS‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﲇ ﳉﻬﺎﺯﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﺆﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﲇ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﴪ￯ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﰲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"TVS OFF‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫"‪ :"TVS DYNAMIC‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫"‪ :"TVS WIDE‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﲬﺲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫"‪ :"TVS NIGHT‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﲬﺲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫"‪ :"TVS STANDARD‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﲈﻋﺘﲔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺘﲔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺘﲔ‬
‫* ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ‪ TVS‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ Sony‬ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﱄ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﱰﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ(‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‪/‬‬
‫> )ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ ،HDD‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﲑﴎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ‬
‫‪m1 T‬‬
‫‪t١*1M‬‬
‫‪m2T T‬‬
‫‪t t2M‬‬
‫‪٢*m3T T T‬‬
‫‪t t t٢*3M‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﴪﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﻳﺪﻙ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*ﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ M‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ ،HDD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺤﻮﺏ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ )ﻳﻈﻬﺮ "‪.("×1،5‬‬
‫*‪ m3 ٢‬ﻭ‪ 3M‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺊ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻻﻃﺎﺭ(‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫*‬
‫* ﺇﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪) X‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ(‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.H‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ،TVS‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Digital Out‬ﺇﱃ "‪ "On‬ﻭ‬
‫"‪ "Dolby Digital‬ﺇﱃ "‪ "D-PCM‬ﻭ "‪ "MPEG‬ﺇﱃ "‪ "PCM‬ﰲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪."Audio‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﲈﻋﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺳﲈﻉ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺳﲈﻉ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ( ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺳﺘﲈﻋﻚ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻬﲈ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ COAXIAL) DIGITAL OUT‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ (OPTICAL‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ MPEG‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪ "MPEG‬ﺇﱃ "‪ "MPEG‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ ،"Audio‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.TVS‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ ٩٦ kHz PCM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ DTS‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﳍﲈ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﺤﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ DTS‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ ‪CD‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ ‪ CD‬ﻣﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ ،DTS‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺻﺎﺧﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﱰﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺨﺬ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﱰﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ™‪ ،DTS Digital Surround‬ﳚﺐ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺓ ‪ ٥،١‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ( ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﱃ "‪ "Stereo‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ DTS‬ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ ‪) CD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﰐ‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫ﲣﺮﺝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ DTS‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪DIGITAL OUT‬‬
‫)‪ COAXIAL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (OPTICAL‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ ،DTS‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "DTS‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫"‪ "On‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪) "Audio‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ ،"Video Settings‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪Video Settings‬‬
‫‪Select the item you want to change.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪C NR :‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪BNR :‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪MNR :‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪DVE :‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﲢﺘﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪) 3 2 1‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫"‪) :"Y NR‬ﺿﻌﻴﻒ( ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪) 3 2 1‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫"‪) :"C NR‬ﺿﻌﻴﻒ( ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪) 3 2 1‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫"‪) :"BNR‬ﺿﻌﻴﻒ( ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪) 3 2 1‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫"‪) :"MNR‬ﺿﻌﻴﻒ( ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫"‪) :*"DVE‬ﺿﻌﻴﻒ( ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪) 3 2 1‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫"‪:"PB Video Equalizer‬‬
‫• ‪) : Contrast‬ﺿﻌﻴﻒ( ‪) 3 ~ 0 ~ -3‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬
‫• ‪) : Brightness‬ﺩﺍﻛﻦ( ‪) 3 ~ 0 ~ -3‬ﺳﺎﻃﻊ(‬
‫• ‪) : Colour‬ﺧﻔﻴﻒ( ‪) 3 ~ 0 ~ -3‬ﺩﺍﻛﻦ(‬
‫• ‪) : Hue‬ﺃﲪﺮ( ‪) 3 ~ 0 ~ -3‬ﺃﺧﴬ(‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫* "‪ "1‬ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ "2" .‬ﺗﻌﺰﺯ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Y NR :‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ </,‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭ"‪ "3‬ﺗﻌﺰﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ "‪."2‬‬
‫‪PB Video Equalizer‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫"‪) "Y NR‬ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﻋﻨﴫ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫"‪) "C NR‬ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﻋﻨﴫ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫"‪) "BNR‬ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ » ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ « ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎﺀ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫"‪) "MNR‬ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ(‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻛﻞ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫"‪) "DVE‬ﻣﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ :‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫"‪) "PB Video Equalizer‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫• ‪ : Contrast‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Brightness‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Colour‬ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﱪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Hue‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "BNR‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "MNR‬ﺇﱃ "‪."Off‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺗﺪﺍﺭﻙ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ Y NR ،MNR ،BNR‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C NR‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،DVE‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﴅ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ BNR‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﺔ ‪.DVE‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ‪ DVE‬ﺇﱃ "‪ "1‬ﺃﻭ "‪."Off‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪DATA CD‬‬
‫‪CD‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ ،"Audio Settings‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺮﺝ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ‪.(R-AUDIO-L) LINE OUT‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ </M/m/,‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﲣﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻺﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﰲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﳌﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻴﻔ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫"‪:(TVS) "Surround‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٥١‬‬
‫"‪ : "Audio Filter‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٢٢٬٠٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ *Fs‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ ٤٤٬١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪ ٢٤ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ Fs‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ ٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ Fs‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٩٦‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Sharp‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪ :‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻭﺇﺣﺴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Slow‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺻﻮﺗ ﹰﺎ ﻧﺎﻋ ﹰﲈ ﺩﺍﻓﺌ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"AV SYNC‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺄﺧﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻴﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻔﺮ ﺇﱃ ‪ ١٢٠‬ﻣﻴﻠﲇ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﲈ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻛﺒﲑ ﹰﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﲇ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ‬
‫)ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.X‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ABCD 9‬‬
‫‪News‬‬
‫‪Stereo‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﺃﻭ ‪ H‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.HDD‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪) x‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬‫ ﺿﻐﻂ –‪.PROG +/‬‬‫ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪.DVD‬‬‫ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪) Z‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﻏﻠﻖ(‪.‬‬‫ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬‫ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪.INPUT SELECT‬‬‫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ DV‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﻨﺌﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺍﺋ ﹰﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺎﺭﻕ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺑﴪﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ )ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫» ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ « ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺩﺍﻋﻲ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻻﺧﻴﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ ،"Chasing Playback‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،(VR‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ×‪.1‬‬‫ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ HQ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.HSP‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﺠﻤﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺍﺋ ﹰﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻓﺎﺭﻕ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺑﴪﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪DATA CD DATA DVD CD‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ » ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﲔ « ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪:HDD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.HDD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪:DVD‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ‪.HDD‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪:١*(VR‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﲆ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.٢*(VR‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﲔ(‬
‫ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﲔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ×‪.1‬‬‫ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ HQ‬ﺃﻭ ‪.HSP‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ HQ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .HSP‬ﺗﺘﺠﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﱰﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ ،VIDEO CD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪،CD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DATA DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.HDD‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.HDD‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TITLE LIST‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.HDD‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Play‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.HDD‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TITLE LIST‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Play‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ NTSC‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ .HDD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،VIDEO CD‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Colour System‬ﺇﱃ "‪"PAL‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪SET‬‬
‫‪CLEAR‬‬
‫‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫‪VISUAL‬‬
‫‪SEARCH‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﺮﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ VISUAL SEARCH‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪9 World Sports‬‬
‫‪VISUAL SEARCH‬‬
‫)‪Chapter 4(30‬‬
‫‪0:12:45‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،</,‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪DATA CD DATA DVD CD‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻈﺮ ﹰﺍ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﳏﺪﺩ ﳍﺎ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ "‪ "Title Search‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.HDD‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫"‪) "Title Search‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪(DVD‬‬
‫"‪) "Chapter Search‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪/HDD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪(DVD‬‬
‫"‪) "Track Search‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪/CD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪(DATA CD‬‬
‫"‪) "Search‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪(VIDEO CD‬‬
‫"‪) "Album Search‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪/DATA DVD‬‬
‫‪(DATA CD‬‬
‫"‪) "Time Search‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪/HDD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ :(DVD‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫"‪) "File Search‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪/DATA DVD‬‬
‫‪(DATA CD‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪Title Search :‬‬
‫)‪Title : -- (21‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﻳﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪Time Search :‬‬
‫ﻹﳚﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﲔ‪ ١٠ ،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫"‪."21020‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‪ CLEAR ،‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫ﺭﻗ ﹰﲈ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ‪MP3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪DATA CD DATA DVD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DATA CD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪/CD-ROM‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪/CD-R‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ (CD-RW‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DATA DVD‬‬
‫)ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪/DVD-ROM‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪/DVD+RW‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ /DVD+R‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ /DVD-RW‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪.(DVD-R‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪TIME/TEXT‬‬
‫‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫>‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪Music Album‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪DISPLAY‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪Classic‬‬
‫‪Opera‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Classic‬‬
‫‪Symphony‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dance‬‬
‫‪Samba‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Jazz‬‬
‫‪Live‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪Jazz‬‬
‫‪Piano‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪Pop music‬‬
‫‪My heart‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪Pop music‬‬
‫‪Paradise‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪Pop music‬‬
‫‪The Best‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"View Album‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪8 The Best‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.H‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،MP3‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﰲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.H‬‬
‫‪01 Holiday‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪02 Lonely‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪03 Candy‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪04 Rainy day‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪05 Station‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪06 Magic‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪07 Moon‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪08 Butterfly‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫"‪ :"Play‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Play Beginning‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Track Data‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.x‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ m/M‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﰐ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ > ﺃﻭ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﲆ > ﺃﻭ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺬﻫﺐ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ( ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﱰﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪"Rotate Right‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ "‪ ،"Rotate Left‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﴎﻋﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪Photo Album‬‬
‫‪ROOT‬‬
‫‪Flowers‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Summer‬‬
‫‪Aquarium‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Summer‬‬
‫‪Festival‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Summer‬‬
‫‪Hiking‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪Summer‬‬
‫‪Tennis match‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪Summer‬‬
‫‪Zoo‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪Winter‬‬
‫‪Consert‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪Winter‬‬
‫‪Party‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"View Album‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪6 Zoo‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪DSC00029 25.11.2005 15:50‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ ،"Slideshow Speed‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ "‪) "Fast‬ﴎﻳﻊ( "‪ "Normal‬ﻭ "‪."Slow‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ >‪ ./‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.x‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DATA CD‬ﲠﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻭ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ </,‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ </,‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DISPLAY‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪TIME/TEXT‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ x‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻠﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٨٠ × ٧٢٠‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‬
‫‪.٤٨٠ × ٧٢٠‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻛﱪ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﳏﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻻﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"View Image‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Slideshow‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Image Data‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﲈﺕ‬
‫‪ JPEG .ISO/MPEG‬ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪MP3‬‬
‫)‪ MPEG1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ (3‬ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DATA CD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ /CD-ROM‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ /CD-R‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ (CD-RW‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DATA DVD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪/DVD-ROM‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ /DVD+RW‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ /DVD+R‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ /DVD-RW‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪.(DVD-R‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DATA CD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO9660‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ‪ ،1‬ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ Joliet‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ .MP3‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DATA DVD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ .(UDF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪/CD-R‬‬
‫‪ DVD-RW/DVD-R/CD-RW‬ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻼﺕ‬
‫)ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ‪/‬ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺣﻞ‪/‬ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﰲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ CD‬ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺤﻜﻤﺔ ‪ Video CD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﺣﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ DATA DVD/DATA CD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﰲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫‪.Packet Write‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ "‪ ".mp3" ،".MP3‬ﺃﻭ‬‫"‪.".Mp3‬‬
‫ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ "‪،".JPG" ،".jpg" ،".JPEG‬‬‫"‪ ".jpeg" ،".Jpg‬ﺃﻭ "‪.".Jpeg‬‬
‫ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪.*DCF‬‬
‫*‬
‫"‪) "Design rule for Camera File system‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑﺍ(‪ :‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﻫﺎ ‪JEITA‬‬
‫)‪Japan Electronics and Information Technology‬‬
‫‪.(Industries Association‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ "‪".Mp3" ،".mp3" ،".MP3‬‬
‫"‪ ".jpeg" ،".Jpg" ،".JPG" ،".jpg" ،".JPEG‬ﺃﻭ "‪ ".Jpeg‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .JPEG‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺻﺎﺧﺒﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.mp3PRO‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﳍﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ "*"‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ ‪١‬‬
‫‪ROOT‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪،DATA CD/DATA DVD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٩٩‬ﳎﻠﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻻﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪(.JPEG/MP3‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﳎﻠﺪ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻻﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪JPEG /MP3‬ﻭﺍﳌﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.(.JPEG/MP3‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﳎﻠﺪ ﻭﻣﻠﻒ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪(.JPEG/MP3‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٦٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﻴﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﰐ ‪MP3/‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DATA DVD/DATA CD‬ﻭﺗﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،H‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﳌﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﱄ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺣﺘﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .7‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪) .‬ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ,‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .(2‬ﺃﻱ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳍﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﰲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻉ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ C :‬ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ‪ D‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ 4‬ﻗﺒﻞ ‪(.5‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ TITLE LIST‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﲈﺀ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٨‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺃﺳﲈﺀ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .GT F T D T C T B T A‬ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻻﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ( )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ‪ (E‬ﻻﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺿﻔﺖ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪ ،03 ،02 ،01‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﺳﲈﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺃﻭﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﲠﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺮ ﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻓﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺜﲑﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻮﴆ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻻﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺮﻋﲔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﲑﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪HDD‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪:(VR‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ )ﻳﺴﻤﻰ » ﺃﺻﲇ «( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ )ﺗﺴﻤﻰ » ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ «(‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻈﺮ ﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻛ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﲈ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﰲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻪ ﻭﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﺎﻳﲇ ﻭﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﳖﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺻﲇ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ )ﺇﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ .‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٣‬‬‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻔﻮﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٣‬‬‫ ﳏﻮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٣‬‬‫ ﳏﻮ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٥‬‬‫ ﳏﻮ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺣﺬﻑ ‪) (A-B‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٤‬‬‫ ﳏﻮ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٦‬‬‫ ﳏﻮ ﻓﺼﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٤‬‬‫ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﲔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﻲ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺻﲇ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻈﺮ ﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﱰﻙ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .(VR‬ﻭﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﰲ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﲇ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﲡﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﳍﺎﻣﺔ ﻛﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)» ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٧‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻔﻮﻱ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٣‬‬‫ ﳏﻮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٣‬‬‫ ﳏﻮ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٥‬‬‫ ﳏﻮ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺣﺬﻑ ‪) (A-B‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٤‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ )ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪ (VR‬ﻓﻘﻂ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٨‬‬
‫ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٥‬‬‫ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٩‬‬‫ ﳏﻮ ﻓﺼﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٤‬‬‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ )ﺍﻷﺻﲇ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Original‬ﺃﻭ "‪."Playlist‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺻﲇ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﳏﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﲑ ﴐﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ "‪ "Copy-Once‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW/DVD+RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪/‬‬
‫‪DVD-R/DVD+R‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (VR‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٧‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫ﳏﻮ ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﺮ ﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﲠﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻔﻮﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٣‬‬‫ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٣‬‬‫ ﳏﻮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٣‬‬‫ ﳏﻮ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٥‬‬‫ ﳏﻮ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺣﺬﻑ ‪) (A-B‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD+RW‬‬‫ﻓﻘﻂ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫ ﳏﻮ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٦‬‬‫ ﳏﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ(‬‫)ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻭ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD+R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،DVD-R‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﳖﺎﺀ ﲨﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﳏﻮ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ DVD+R‬ﻭ ‪.DVD-R‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﲑ ﴐﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪،</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪TOOLS‬‬
‫>‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪CHAPTER‬‬
‫‪MARK ERASE‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪CHAPTER‬‬
‫‪MARK‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ DVD-RW‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،VR‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻭﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪ "Original‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "Playlist‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﴐﻭﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Erase‬ﳏﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "OK‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Protect‬ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "On‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ " " ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪."Off‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫"‪ :"Title Name‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٣‬‬
‫"‪ :"Set Thumbnail‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫"‪ :"A-B Erase‬ﳏﻮ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫"‪ :"Delete Chapter‬ﳏﻮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ )ﺇﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Divide‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﲔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﳏﻮ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٦٥‬ﺃﻭ ﳏﻮ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﳏﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٤‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Yes‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﳏﻮ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )‪(A-B Erase‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺴﻢ )ﻣﻨﻈﺮ( ﰲ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﳏﻮﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﲤﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﰲ » ﳏﻮ ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ «‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪ "A-B Erase‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.A‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪..‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(VR‬‬
‫‪5 Weather‬‬
‫)‪A–B Erase (Set point A‬‬
‫ﳏﻮ ﻓﺼﻞ )‪(Delete Chapter‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﳏﻮ ﻗﺴﻢ ﰲ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﳏﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺇﲤﺎﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﰲ » ﳏﻮ ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ «‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪ ،"Delete Chapter‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻞ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪،</,‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Delete Selected Chapters 9 World Sports‬‬
‫)‪Chapter 4(30‬‬
‫‪0:12:45‬‬
‫‪Reset All‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﳌﺤﻮ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Reset All‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ A‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،m/M‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.B‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ B‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،m/M‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،B‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Change A‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫"‪ ،"Change B‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪.3‬‬
‫• ﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪) "Preview‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪.(DVD+RW‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺩ ﳏﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Yes‬ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬
‫• ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."No‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳊﻈﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺤﻮ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﲬﺲ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﳏﻮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،DVD+RW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﳏﻮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪(Erase Titles‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ ،"EraseTitles‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪. ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪* -RWVR‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺃﻗﴫ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﲤﺎﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Divide‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻭﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Original‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "Playlist‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﴐﻭﺭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪..‬‬
‫‪1 Vacation‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ )‪(Divide‬‬
‫‪Divide‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺻﺢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺢ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﱰ "‪."Reset All‬‬
‫‪Erase Titles‬‬
‫‪Select the titles to erase.‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪Reset All‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪28.10‬‬
‫‪Tennis‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪26.10‬‬
‫‪Travel‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪25.10‬‬
‫‪Mystry‬‬
‫‪19.10‬‬
‫‪World Sports‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪17.10‬‬
‫‪Family‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ‬
‫ﳏﻮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﳏﻮﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Change‬ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،m/M‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Change‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Yes‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﲈ ﺳﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."No‬‬
‫ﺇﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﴩﺡ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٣٣‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺛﻨﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﳏﻮ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫ﳏﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫)‪(Disc Map‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺗﺴﺎﻋ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،Disc Map‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻔﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ ،"Disc Map‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪."Disc Map‬‬
‫• ﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.</,‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪Disc Map‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ ،"Disc Info‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪2.3 GB‬‬
‫‪LSP: 1H15M‬‬
‫‪SEP: 4H00M‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ "‪."Disc Information‬‬
‫‪Empty Title‬‬
‫‪SP : 1H00M‬‬
‫‪SLP: 3H00M‬‬
‫‪HSP: 0H45M‬‬
‫‪EP : 2H00M‬‬
‫‪HQ: 0H30M‬‬
‫‪LP : 1H30M‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Erase All‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﳏﻮ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺤﻤﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Erase‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ b‬ﻋﲆ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.</,‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،</,‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﳌﺤﻮ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬
‫‪Disc Map‬‬
‫‪2 Journey‬‬
‫‪SP 0.6GB‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫)‪Fri 17.9.2004 20:00 (1H00M‬‬
‫‪Erase‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Erase‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Change‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪.٩٧‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﳏﻮ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪،"Create Playlist‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪Create Playlist‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪ "Marking...‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﺼﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Select a title to start capturing.‬‬
‫‪Scene List‬‬
‫‪ORIGINAL‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫ﳊﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻓﺼﻠﲔ ﺑﻤﺤﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ >‪ ./‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.CHAPTER MARK ERASE‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CHAPTER MARK‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﳍﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Auto Chapter‬ﰲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Features‬ﺇﱃ "‪."Off‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪28.10‬‬
‫‪Tennis‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪26.10‬‬
‫‪Travel‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪25.10‬‬
‫‪Mystry‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪19.10‬‬
‫‪World Sports‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪17.10‬‬
‫‪Family‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪15.10‬‬
‫‪Nature‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺿﻤﻪ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Capture‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Capture All‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﺇﱃ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.8‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Capture‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ )‪ .(IN‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ X‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪..‬‬
‫‪9 World Sports‬‬
‫)‪Capture(Set IN point‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ IN‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،m/M‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )‪ ،(OUT‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﰲ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ OUT‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،m/M‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ IN‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،OUT‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Change IN‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫"‪ "Change OUT‬ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Preview‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻊ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫‪Scenes 1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫‪Total 0:13:19‬‬
‫‪Scene List‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Quit‬‬
‫‪World Sports‬‬
‫‪0:10:26 - 0:23:45‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Preview‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Add‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬
‫• ﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺇﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪."Preview‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫"‪ :"Move‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫"‪ :"Erase‬ﳏﻮ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ :"Preview‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫"‪ :"Change IN‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ IN‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.5‬‬
‫"‪ :"Change OUT‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ OUT‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.6‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪"OK‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪) "Enter‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "OK‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﳼ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪ "Playlist‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.H‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ‪ IN‬ﻭ ‪ OUT‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)‪(Change Order‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TITLE LIST‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻭﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪."Playlist‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Change Order‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Change Order‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪15.9‬‬
‫‪Vacation‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫?‪Where do you want to move this title‬‬
‫‪17.9‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧ ﹰﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪،M/m‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪Journey‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫)‪(Combine‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TITLE LIST‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻭﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪."Playlist‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ ،"Combine‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪Combine‬‬
‫‪Select the titles to combine.‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪Reset All‬‬
‫‪25. 9‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪Yacht‬‬
‫‪25. 9‬‬
‫‪Cruising‬‬
‫‪17. 9‬‬
‫‪Journey‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪15. 9‬‬
‫‪Vacation‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺇﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺪ￯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﳎﻪ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﻘﺮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪(Divide‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Enter Text‬ﻭﺇﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Change‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٦٥‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺩﳎﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Reset All‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﳎﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Change‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬
‫‪Combine‬‬
‫‪Combine the titles in the following order.‬‬
‫‪25. 9‬‬
‫‪Yacht‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪25. 9‬‬
‫‪Cruising‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪Change‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ y HDD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪(DVD‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﰲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ » ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ « ﺗﺸﲑ ﺇﱃ » ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ )‪ (HDD‬ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﲇ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ «‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﲣﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )‪ « (Title Dub‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ ،(٧٢‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫– ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪ « (Dub Selected Titles‬ﰲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٧٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﲆ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪ ،DV IN‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ « DV‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٧٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ ،LINE IN‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‪٠٠٠‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٨‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD+RW‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD+R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .DVD-R‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "DVD Bilingual Rec.‬ﺇﱃ "‪) "Main‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ "‪ "Sub‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪) "Options‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Auto Chapter‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Features‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫"‪ ،"On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻓﱰﺍﺕ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪،DVD‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﹰﺍ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ .HDD‬ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﰲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺧﻠﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ )‪ ١٦:٩‬ﺃﻭ ‪:(٤:٣‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD-R‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﰲ‬
‫"‪) "DVD Rec. Picture Size‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٢‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD+RW‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD+R‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺋ ﹰﲈ‬
‫‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،(VR‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﲆ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺻﲇ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ ،HDD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺻ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVD‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫‪.HDD‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﳊﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٣٠‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ "‪"Dub Mode‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫"‪ ."Dub Mode‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻣﺎﻳﲇ ﻭﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(High-Speed Dubbing‬‬
‫‪< HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺎﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﹴ‬
‫ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ×‪/٨‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD+RW‬‬
‫ﹴ‬
‫ﹴ‬
‫ﺑﴪﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ×‪/٦‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD+R‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﹴ‬
‫ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ×‪ ١٦‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻻﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺄ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫×‪/١٦‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD-R‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Dub Mode‬ﺇﱃ "‪ "Fast‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ "‪"Title Dub‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ "‪) "Dub Selected Titles‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٧٢‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ "Fast‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﰲ » ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ « ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ .‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ 60‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(*‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ*‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪HQ‬‬
‫‪HSP‬‬
‫×‪6‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪DVD-R DVD+RW DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪LSP‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪EP‬‬
‫‪SLP‬‬
‫‪SEP‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 40‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 40‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 60‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ*‪٥‬‬
‫‪ 60‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ*‪٥‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 45‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 56‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪DVD+R‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪DVD+R‬‬
‫)ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ(‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ 25‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 45‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 40‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 60‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ*‪ 60 ٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ*‪٥‬‬
‫‪ 60‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ*‪ 60 ٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻫﻲ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﴡ ﻟﴪﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﴪﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮ￯ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﴎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺪ￯ ﺃﻗﴡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﴡ ﴎﻋﺔ ﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻫﻲ ×‪ 6‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ DVD+RW‬ﴎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ×‪ 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﴎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﴡ ﴎﻋﺔ ﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻫﻲ ×‪ 8‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪/DVD+R‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-R‬ﴎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ×‪ 8‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﴎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ SLP‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ SEP‬ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪.DVD+R‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪n HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪ ،‬ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﺴﺦ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪) HQ‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﲑ( ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،SP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻭﺿﻌ ﹰﺎ ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ ﰲ "‪ "Dub Mode‬ﰲ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ » ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )‪ « (Title Dub‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٧٢‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫» ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪ « (Dub Selected Titles‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٧٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ HQ‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HQ+‬ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻴﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻻﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﳉﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ y HDD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪(DVD‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﻭ‪ 40‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪LP‬‬
‫×‪٣*6‬‬
‫×‪٤*8‬‬
‫×‪٤*8‬‬
‫×‪2.4‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.HQ+‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.((VR‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﳐﻠﺘﻒ )‪ 4:3‬ﻭ ‪ ،16:9‬ﺍﻟﺦ( )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.((VR‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪/‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪/DVD+RW‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪/DVD+R‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD-R‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﲑﺓ‬
‫ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD+R DL‬ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳊﻈﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻹﺧﺮ￯ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ .HDD‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ ،HDD‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﳑﻜﻦ‬
‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ(‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪,‬‬
‫<‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫<‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪* -RWVR‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Dubbing‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪-RWVR‬‬
‫‪< HDD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ » ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ « ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺇﱃ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ *(VR‬ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﳏﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ .(HDD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫» ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ « ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ .(٧٢‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ » ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ « ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TITLE LIST‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٧٢‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ "‪ ،"Move‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Yes‬‬
‫‪2.0GB‬‬
‫‪2.6GB‬‬
‫‪Title Dub‬‬
‫‪This title will be dubbed. Set the dub mode.‬‬
‫‪Rec Mode: SP‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.HDD‬‬
‫ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﳏﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﳏﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.HDD‬‬
‫* ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (VR‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ CPRM‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪1 World Cup Final‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪Dub Mode‬‬
‫‪SP 2.0GB‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺇﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )‪(Title Dub‬‬
‫* ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (VR‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ CPRM‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪) CPRM‬ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﲑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﲢﻤﻲ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Dub Mode‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.M/m‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪LSP‬‬
‫‪LP‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪HSP‬‬
‫‪EP‬‬
‫‪HQ‬‬
‫‪SLP‬‬
‫ﴎﻳﻊ*‬
‫‪SEP‬‬
‫* ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٧٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Start‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )‪(Auto Dub Mode‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.8‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫)‪(Dub Selected Titles‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﴡ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Auto Dub Mode‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﹰ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Reset‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.7‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪،"Dub Selected Titles‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪0.0GB‬‬
‫‪Dub Selected Titles‬‬
‫‪Select title(s) in the order you want to dub them.‬‬
‫‪ORIGINAL‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Reset‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ ،"Stop Dubbing‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ .ENTER‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Yes‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻠﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻐﲑ ﴐﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺈﲤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪25.6‬‬
‫‪4 World Tour – Asia 3‬‬
‫‪20.6‬‬
‫‪3 World Cup Final‬‬
‫‪18.6‬‬
‫‪2 World Tour – Asia 2‬‬
‫‪11.6‬‬
‫‪1 World Tour – Asia 1‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺑﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٧٢‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ "‪ ،"Move‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Yes‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 5‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ y HDD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪(DVD‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TITLE LIST‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪There is not enough memory for the dubbing.‬‬
‫‪Select "Auto Dub Mode" or adjust the mode.‬‬
‫‪Reset‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪4.6GB‬‬
‫‪Title Dub‬‬
‫‪Auto Dub Mode‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪) "Settings‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ «‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ "‪ ،"Reset‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.5‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Start‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻦ » ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫)‪ « (Dub Selected Titles‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٧٣‬ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪ "Settings‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Change‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻦ » ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪« (Dub Selected Titles‬‬
‫ﳉﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﻊ ﲨﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Auto mode‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )‪(Auto Dub Mode‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 7‬ﻣﻦ » ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫)‪ « (Dub Selected Titles‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٧٣‬‬
‫‪Dub Selected Titles‬‬
‫‪There is not enough memory. Select‬‬
‫‪"Auto Dub Mode" or change the selection.‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪4.6GB‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪2.1GB‬‬
‫‪Dub Selected Titles‬‬
‫‪Adjust the settings for the dubbing here.‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪World Tour – Asia 1‬‬
‫‪11.6‬‬
‫‪Rec Mode: SP‬‬
‫‪Dub Mode: Fast 0.3GB‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Auto mode‬‬
‫‪World Tour – Asia 2‬‬
‫‪18.6‬‬
‫‪Rec Mode: SP‬‬
‫‪Dub Mode: Fast 0.3GB‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪World Tour – Asia 3‬‬
‫‪25.6‬‬
‫‪Rec Mode: SP‬‬
‫‪Dub Mode: Fast 0.3GB‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪World Cup Final‬‬
‫‪Rec Mode: SP‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪Change‬‬
‫‪20.6‬‬
‫‪Dub Mode: Fast 1.2GB‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﲨﺎﱄ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺇﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ )ﺇﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ(‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Dub Mode‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٧٠‬‬
‫"‪ :"Change Order‬ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ M/m‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫"‪ :"Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Start‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪Change‬‬
‫‪Auto Dub Mode‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Auto Dub Mode‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .ENTER‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."OK‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ ،"Stop Dubbing‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ .ENTER‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Yes‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺈﲤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "DUBBING‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪DV‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪DV‬‬
‫ﻳﴩﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ DV IN‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ ،LINE IN‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪DV IN‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ DV IN‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‬
‫‪ .i.LINK‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﳎﻬﺰ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪ (DV) i.LINK‬ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﰲ » ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪،« DV‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ،i.LINK‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫» ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ‪ « i.LINK‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠١‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ DV IN‬ﳐﺼﺺ ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ DV IN‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﺇﱃ‬‫ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ LINE IN‬ﻭﺇﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ » ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٧‬‬
‫ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .DVC-SD‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ MICRO MV‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﳎﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪.i.LINK‬‬
‫ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﻌﻮﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVD‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪DV IN‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪DV‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﲣﻄﻂ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺿﺎﰲ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ DV IN‬ﻭﺳﺠﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (VR‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.HDD‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) i.LINK‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪DV‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ DV IN‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪/DV‬ﴍﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .Digital8‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﴍﺓ ﻷﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ ﻭﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﲇ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ » ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ « DV‬ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ ﺍﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪DV‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪:‬ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ» ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ «‬
‫ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﴍﻳﻂ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪/DV‬ﴍﻳﻂ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ Digital8‬ﰲ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ INPUT SELECT‬ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪."DV‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫‪DV‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪L3‬‬
‫‪L2‬‬
‫‪L1‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ REC MODE‬ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﲈ ﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫‪LSP‬‬
‫‪LP‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪SP‬‬
‫‪EP‬‬
‫‪HSP‬‬
‫‪SLP‬‬
‫‪HQ‬‬
‫‪SEP‬‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ ،"DV Audio Input‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .ENTER‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫"‪) "Stereo1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪ :‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﴍﻳﻂ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪.DV‬‬
‫"‪ :"Mix‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺳﱰﻳﻮ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪.2‬‬
‫"‪ :"Stereo2‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﰲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Mix‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "Stereo2‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺈﲤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫» ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٢‬‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪/DV‬ﴍﻳﻂ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪Digital8‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﴍﻳﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫)‪ ٤٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٤٤٫١ ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ "‪ "Auto Chapter‬ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ،(٧٨ ،٧٧‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳊﻈﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﲑ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳌﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺊ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪) DV‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﲬﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﳌﺪﺓ ﲬﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻍ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.x REC STOP‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪/DV‬ﴍﻳﻂ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ Digital8‬ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ONE-TOUCH DUB‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﲤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻦ » ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪ « DV‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ONE-TOUCH DUB‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﱰﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﱰﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ ﰲ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪DV‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Auto Chapter‬ﰲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Features‬ﺇﱃ "‪ ،"On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،(VR‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪ ٦‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.x REC STOP‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻀﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Finalize Disc‬ﻣﻦ "‪ "One Touch Dubbing‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫"‪ "Auto‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪) "Features‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(٩٠‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﲡﻬﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ((VR‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺳﺎﺑﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪+RW‬‬
‫‪-RWVideo -RWVR‬‬
‫‪+R‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "DV EDIT‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪-R‬‬
‫‪Scenes Selection‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪/DV‬ﴍﻳﻂ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ Digital8‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫?‪Do you want to select a scene‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﲇ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻌﻪ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ‪IN‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ OUT‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺇﺧﱰﲥﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﳏﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪ ،"Saved Data‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.6‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Start‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪) IN‬ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪Select scene(Set IN point‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻌﻪ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪Controlling...‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Auto Chapter‬ﰲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Features‬ﺇﱃ "‪ ،"On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،(VR‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﱃ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ‪ ٦‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 1‬ﺇﱃ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻦ » ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﲑ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ « DV‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٧٥‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ IN‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،m/M‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪) OUT‬ﳖﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻬﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﰲ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.IN‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ OUT‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ ،m/M‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﳌﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ."Preview‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ IN‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،OUT‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Change IN‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫"‪ ،"Change OUT‬ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬
‫‪Scenes Selection‬‬
‫‪Do you want to capture the scene‬‬
‫?‪between IN 0:00:30 and OUT 0:00:52‬‬
‫‪Change OUT‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Change IN‬‬
‫‪Preview‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Add‬‬
‫‪SCENE LIST‬‬
‫‪Total 0:00:22‬‬
‫‪Scenes 1‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Quit‬‬
‫‪DV Dubbing‬‬
‫‪2.6GB‬‬
‫‪DV EDIT‬‬
‫‪0:00:30-0:00:52‬‬
‫‪0H00M22S‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﳼ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺘ ﹰﺎ ﻭﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Media‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.M/m‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Dub Mode‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.M/m‬‬
‫‪Change the dubbing mode if necessary.‬‬
‫‪Select "Start" to start dubbing.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Start‬‬
‫‪Add‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ‬
‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ :"Move‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ M/m‬ﻭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫"‪ :"Erase‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪."OK‬‬
‫"‪ :"Preview‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ :"Change IN‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬
‫"‪ :"Change OUT‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﳖﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.5‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪،"OK‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Enter‬ﻭﺇﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٣‬‬
‫‪Title Name‬‬
‫‪Enter the title name.‬‬
‫‪DV 11.10.03 13:30 - 12.11.03 16:46‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪SP 0.8GB‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Start‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﳏﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮ ﻣﱪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺇﺧﱰﺗﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Reset‬ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.9‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ‬
‫"‪."Auto Dub Mode‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."OK‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪DV‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﲇ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﲇ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫‪Dub Mode‬‬
‫‪Media‬‬
‫ﺇﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.x REC STOP‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺑﻀﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻻ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﲈ ﻫﻮﻣﱪﻣﺞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﴩﻳﻂ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫» ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٧‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﳖﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﲈ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﴍﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪/DV‬ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ Digital8‬ﰲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﰲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ IN‬ﻭﻭﳖﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ ،OUT‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ‪ IN‬ﻭ ‪ OUT‬ﻗﻠﻴ ﹰ‬
‫ﻼ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﴫ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
.‫ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬PROG +/– ‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
2
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
Settings - Channel Setting
System :
BG
Normal / CATV :
Normal
Channel Set :
C2
Station Name :
CDE
Audio :
NICAM
AFT :
On
.ENTER ‫ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬،"System" ‫ﺇﺧﱰ‬
Settings - Channel Setting
System :
BG
BG
Normal / CATV :
Normal
DK
Channel Set :
C
I3
Station Name :
AAB
L
Audio :
NICAM
AFT :
On
.‫ﻻﲣﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫• ﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫• ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬
.‫ﻻﲣﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
System :
BG
Normal / CATV :
Normal
Normal
Channel Set :
3
C
CATV
Station Name :
CDE
Audio :
NICAM
AFT :
On
BG
Normal / CATV :
Normal
Channel Set :
3
C
C2
Station Name :
CDE
Audio :
NICAM
AFT :
On
4
BG
‫ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬."Settings" ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
.‫ﲢﺘﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬SYSTEM MENU ‫ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬،‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
.‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬
1
2
3
SETUP
DK
I
Settings
Channel Setting
Video
Channel List
Audio
TV Guide Page
Features
Clock
Options
Language
Easy Setup
L
5
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
Prog. 8
.ENTER ‫ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬،"Channel Set" ‫ﺇﺧﱰ‬
System :
‫ ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ‬SYSTEM MENU ‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
.‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
.ENTER ‫ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬،"Settings" ‫ﺇﺧﱰ‬
.ENTER ‫ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬،"Normal" ‫ﺇﺧﱰ‬
."CATV" ‫ ﺇﺧﱰ‬،(‫ )ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬CATV ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
Settings - Channel Setting
،‫ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬،‫" ﻋﲆ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻒ‬Settings" ‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
.‫ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
.ENTER ‫ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬،"SETUP" ‫ﺇﺧﱰ‬
.ENTER ‫ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬،"Normal/CATV" ‫ﺇﺧﱰ‬
Settings - Channel Setting
3
Prog. 8
‫ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬،L ‫ ﺃﻭ‬،I ،DK ،BG ،‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺡ‬
.(٨١ ‫ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ENTER
‫ ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‬،‫ ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‬،‫• ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‬
‫• ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﴩﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻼﻧﺪﺍ‬،‫• ﺃﺳﱰﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ‬
(Settings) ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
Prog. 8
Prog. 8
6
7
.‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
.‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‬،"Easy Setup"
‫ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﱃ‬،‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‬
‫ ﺇﺿﺒﻂ‬."Easy Setup" ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
.‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬،"Settings" ‫" ﰲ‬Channel Setting" ‫ﺇﺧﱰ‬
.ENTER
Settings - Channel Setting
System :
BG
Normal / CATV :
Normal
Channel Set :
C3
Station Name :
AAB
Audio :
NICAM
AFT :
On
1
Prog. 1
٨٠
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ M/m‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﱰﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.٨١‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٥‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ "‪ ."5‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﳍﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪BG‬‬
‫• ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‬
‫• ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﴩﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫• ﺃﺳﱰﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻼﻧﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Audio‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪Prog. 8‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪Standard‬‬
‫‪Settings - Channel Setting‬‬
‫‪BG‬‬
‫‪System :‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫‪Normal / CATV :‬‬
‫‪C5‬‬
‫‪Channel Set :‬‬
‫‪CDE‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪Station Name :‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪Standard‬‬
‫‪Audio :‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪AFT :‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺚ ‪ NICAM‬ﻏﲑ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪S1 - S20 CATV‬‬
‫‪S1 - S46 CATV‬‬
‫‪S21 - S41 HYPER‬‬
‫‪S01 - S05 CATV‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫• ﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫• ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬
‫‪A - J VHF‬‬
‫‪4 - 13 VHF‬‬
‫‪B21 - B69 UHF‬‬
‫‪S1 - S20 CATV‬‬
‫‪S01 - S05 CATV‬‬
‫‪Settings - Channel Setting‬‬
‫‪BG‬‬
‫‪System :‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫‪Normal / CATV :‬‬
‫‪C5‬‬
‫‪Channel Set :‬‬
‫‪CDE‬‬
‫‪Station Name :‬‬
‫‪CDE‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Audio:‬‬
‫‪AFT :‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "On‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،AFT‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪ "Off‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .ENTER‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﴍﻳﻂ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ </,‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪NZ1 - NZ11 VHF‬‬
‫‪S21 - S41 HYPER‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪A - H VHF‬‬
‫‪AS0 - AS12 VHF‬‬
‫‪AS28 - AS69 UHF‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪ 11‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"AFT‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪E2 - E12 VHF‬‬
‫‪E21 - E69 UHF‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"NICAM‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪Prog. 8‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻼﺀ ﺍﳌﻘﻴﻤﲔ ﰲ ﺃﺳﱰﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻼﻧﺪﺍ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﱰﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪C2‬‬
‫‪AS0‬‬
‫‪C3‬‬
‫‪AS1‬‬
‫‪C4‬‬
‫‪AS2‬‬
‫‪S44‬‬
‫‪AS3‬‬
‫‪S46‬‬
‫‪AS4‬‬
‫‪S1‬‬
‫‪AS5‬‬
‫‪S6‬‬
‫‪AS5A‬‬
‫‪C5‬‬
‫‪AS6‬‬
‫‪C6‬‬
‫‪AS7‬‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫‪AS8‬‬
‫‪C8‬‬
‫‪AS9‬‬
‫‪C9‬‬
‫‪AS9A‬‬
‫‪C10‬‬
‫‪AS10‬‬
‫‪C11‬‬
‫‪AS11‬‬
‫‪C12‬‬
‫‪AS12‬‬
‫‪C28‬‬
‫‪AS28‬‬
‫‪C29‬‬
‫‪AS29‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
AS67
C62
AS30
C30
AS68
C63
AS31
C31
AS69
C64
AS32
C31, C32
S1 - S20
S1 - S20
AS33
C32
AS34
C33
AS35
C34
AS36
C35
‫• ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻼﻧﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
NZ1
C2
AS37
C36
NZ2
C3
AS38
C37
NZ3
C4
AS39
C38
NZ4
C5
AS40
C38, C39
NZ5
C6
AS41
C39
NZ6
C7
AS42
C40
NZ7
C8
AS43
C41
NZ8
C9
AS44
C42
NZ9
C10
AS45
C43
NZ10
C11
AS46
C44
NZ11
C12
AS47
C45
E21 - E69
C21 - C69
AS48
C45, C46
S1 - S46
S1 - S46
AS49
C46
AS50
C47
AS51
C48
AS52
C49
AS53
C50
AS54
C51
Station Name
‫ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬.(‫ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬٥ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺇﺳﻢ ﳏﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )ﺣﺘﻲ‬
.‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺳﲈﺀ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬،"Settings" ‫" ﰲ‬Channel Setting" ‫ﺇﺧﱰ‬
.ENTER
Settings - Channel Setting
System :
BG
Normal / CATV :
Normal
Channel Set :
C3
Station Name :
AAB
Audio :
NICAM
AFT :
On
1
Prog. 1
‫ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻩ‬PROG +/– ‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
.‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺔ‬
2
AS55
C52
AS56
C52, C53
AS57
C53
AS58
C54
AS59
C55
AS60
C56
AS61
C57
AS62
C58
AS63
C59
AS64
C59, C60
AS65
C60
AS66
C61
٨٢
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Station Name‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪Input Station Name‬‬
‫"‪"A‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫"‪"a‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪Clear All‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪Space‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪Finish‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪Symbol‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﺳﲈﺀ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺳﲈﺀ ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﳍﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Settings - Channel List‬‬
‫‪Channel‬‬
‫‪Prog‬‬
‫‪AAB‬‬
‫‪C3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪FGH‬‬
‫‪C5‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪C12‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪C21‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪C23‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪C24‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪Name‬‬
‫‪PQR‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ M/m‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳛﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﲑ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CLEAR‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.5‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲣﻄﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻟﻐﻴﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ –‪.PROG +/‬‬
‫‪C12‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪C21‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪C5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪C23‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪C24‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ *Teletext‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﳍﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﲥﺎ )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺦ( ﻳﻮﻣ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺒﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ Teletext‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺈﺳﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﲤﺎﻣ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﲑ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﱃ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻷﳖﺎ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﰲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﳏﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Channel List‬ﰲ "‪ ،"Settings‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪AAB‬‬
‫‪C3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪PQR‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٣٣‬‬
‫‪Name‬‬
‫‪Channel‬‬
‫‪Prog‬‬
‫‪FGH‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ )ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Settings - Channel List‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Finish‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ M/m‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﰲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "TV Guide Page‬ﰲ "‪ ،"Settings‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪,‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ٧‬ﺇﱃ ‪،٩٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ M/m‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ –‪.PROG +/‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ (P301 :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Settings - TV Guide Page‬‬
‫‪Prog. 4‬‬
‫‪P 301‬‬
‫‪Sun‬‬
‫‪P 302‬‬
‫‪Mon‬‬
‫‪P 303‬‬
‫‪Tue‬‬
‫‪P 304‬‬
‫‪Wed‬‬
‫‪P 305‬‬
‫‪Thu‬‬
‫‪P 306‬‬
‫‪Fri‬‬
‫‪P 307‬‬
‫‪Sat‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ )‪ ،(P000‬ﳚﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Settings - TV Guide Page‬‬
‫‪Prog. 4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪P 000‬‬
‫‪Sun‬‬
‫‪P 000‬‬
‫‪Mon‬‬
‫‪P 000‬‬
‫‪Tue‬‬
‫‪P 000‬‬
‫‪Wed‬‬
‫‪P 000‬‬
‫‪Thu‬‬
‫‪P 000‬‬
‫‪Fri‬‬
‫‪P 000‬‬
‫‪Sat‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪Settings - TV Guide Page‬‬
‫‪Prog. 4‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪PP 000‬‬
‫‪0 0‬‬
‫‪Sun‬‬
‫‪P 000‬‬
‫‪Mon‬‬
‫‪P 000‬‬
‫‪Tue‬‬
‫‪P 000‬‬
‫‪Wed‬‬
‫‪P 000‬‬
‫‪Thu‬‬
‫‪P 000‬‬
‫‪Fri‬‬
‫‪P 000‬‬
‫‪Sat‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ </M/m/,‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ CLEAR‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺗﲔ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Teletext‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) TV/VIDEO t‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪.(٨١‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﰲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ "‪ "000‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﰲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪-‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Teletext‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺘﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ Teletext‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺍﺋ ﹰﲈ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‪،‬‬
‫ﳚﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﲏ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Teletext‬ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻀﻄﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪) Auto Adjust‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Present Time‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Clock‬ﰲ "‪ ،"Settings‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Present Time‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪Clock - Present Time‬‬
‫‪Set the time and date manually.‬‬
‫‪0 : 00‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪2005‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Sat 1‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ M/m‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.,‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﱄ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ </,‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪M/m‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ < ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.M/m‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﰲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،3‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ < ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﲑﻩ‪٫‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.M/m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪) OSD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD Menu‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪) Audio‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲣﺘﺎﺭ "‪ ،"Original‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳍﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Subtitle‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲣﺘﺎﺭ "‪ ،"Audio Follow‬ﺗﺘﻐﲑ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰﲥﺎ ﳌﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(Video‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﳊﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SYSTEM MENU‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"SETUP‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Video‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Video‬ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﲢﺘﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪SETUP‬‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲣﺘﺎﺭ "‪ "Others‬ﰲ "‪ "Subtitle" ،"DVD Menu‬ﺃﻭ "‪،"Audio‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ » ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٠٨‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪Pause Mode :‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪Progressive Mode :‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Line Input‬‬
‫‪Features‬‬
‫‪Options‬‬
‫‪Easy Setup‬‬
‫‪TV Type‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫‪) ١٦:٩‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٤٢‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DVD‬ﲡﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪.١٦:٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ )ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪.(٤:٣‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫‪4:3 Letter‬‬
‫‪Box‬‬
‫‪4:3 Pan Scan‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﱂ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﰲ‬
‫"‪ "Subtitle" ،"DVD Menu‬ﺃﻭ "‪ ،"Audio‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪ￯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪16 : 9‬‬
‫‪TV Type :‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ .٤:٣‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﴩﺍﺋﻂ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ .٤:٣‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﺗﺘﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫‪Line Input‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪LINE IN‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪4:3 Letter Box‬‬
‫‪Line1 Input‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪LINE IN 1‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫‪4:3 Pan Scan‬‬
‫‪S Video‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫‪Line3 Input‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "4:3 Letter Box‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺪ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫"‪ "4:3 Pan Scan‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Pause Mode‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪/HDD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪Frame‬‬
‫ﲣﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻊ ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﲣﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Progressive Mode‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﱃ ﻧﻮﻋﲔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ ٦٠/‬ﳎﺎﻝ )‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ ٥٠/‬ﳎﺎﻝ( ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲣﺮﺝ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻡ )‪ ٥٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻲ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳌﻮﺍﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ 625p/525p‬ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲣﺮﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫)ﻳﻀﺊ "‪.("PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳚﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﳎﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٤‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ )ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻭﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪LINE IN 3‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫‪S Video‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(Audio‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ "‪ "Audio‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SYSTEM MENU‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"SETUP‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪) Audio DRC‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ( )ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺤ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲣﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ "‪ ."Audio DRC‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪LINE OUT R-AUDIO-L‬‬‫ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ OPTICAL) DIGITAL OUT‬ﺃﻭ ‪(COAXIAL‬‬‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Dolby Digital‬ﺇﱃ "‪"D-PCM‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫‪Standard‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Audio‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Audio‬ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﲢﺘﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV Mode‬‬
‫‪Wide Range‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﳚﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺣﻔﻠﺔ ﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪SETUP‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Audio ATT :‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Standard‬‬
‫‪Audio DRC :‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫‪Dolby Surround‬‬
‫‪Downmix :‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Audio Connection‬‬
‫‪Features‬‬
‫‪Options‬‬
‫‪Easy Setup‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻮﻫ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻂ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﲠﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﴏ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ )ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫‪ .Dolby Digital‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ» ‪ .4‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ « ﰲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٣١‬ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪LINE OUT R-AUDIO-L‬‬‫ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ OPTICAL) DIGITAL OUT‬ﺃﻭ ‪(COAXIAL‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Dolby Digital‬ﺇﱃ "‪) "D-PCM‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪Surround‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﲣﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺫﻭﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺄﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻠﻂ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﲔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﱰﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪) Audio ATT‬ﲣﻔﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﻮﻫ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺇﱃ "‪ ."On‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺛﺮﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪LINE OUT R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪) Downmix‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫‪Audio Connection‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ )ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ( ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ :4‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ « ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "DTS" ،"MPEG" ،"Dolby Digital‬ﻭ‬
‫"‪ "48kHz/96kHz PCM‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ "‪ "Digital Out‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫"‪."On‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺧﺐ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺃﺫﻧﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Audio Connection‬ﰲ "‪ ،"Audio‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪Audio - Audio Connection‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪D-PCM‬‬
‫‪Dolby Digital :‬‬
‫‪PCM‬‬
‫‪MPEG :‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪DTS :‬‬
‫‪48kHz/16bit‬‬
‫‪48kHz/96kHz PCM :‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ"‪ ،"Digital Out‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪Digital Out :‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"On‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) Dolby Digital‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪/HDD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪.Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪D-PCM‬‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ Dolby Digital‬ﺩﺍﺧﲇ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳋﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻨﺪ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ "‪ "Downmix‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪."Audio‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ Dolby Digital‬ﺩﺍﺧﲇ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) MPEG‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪MPEG‬‬
‫‪PCM‬‬
‫‪MPEG‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪MPEG‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﲇ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ،MPEG‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﱰﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪ COAXIAL) DIGITAL OUT‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.(OPTICAL‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪MPEG‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﲇ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) DTS‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ DTS‬ﺃﻡ ﻻ‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪ DTS‬ﺩﺍﺧﲇ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﲑ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪DTS‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﲇ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) 48kHz/96kHz PCM‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪48kHz/‬‬
‫‪16bit‬‬
‫‪96kHz/‬‬
‫‪24bit‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ‪ ٤٨kHz/١٦‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﳋﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﲣﺮﺝ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬
‫‪ ٩٦kHz/٢٤‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﲣﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٤٨kHz/١٦‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﳏﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﲥﻴﺌﺔ "‪ "48kHz/96kHz PCM‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﳍﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﲑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲣﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ .(R-AUDIO-L) LINE 2 OUT‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ‪ ،٩٦kHz‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ ٩٦kHz‬ﻭﺍﳋﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ COAXIAL) DIGITAL OUT‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ (OPTICAL‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ MPEG‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ "‪"MPEG‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ "‪ "MPEG‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ ،"Audio‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.TVS‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﲢﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ )‪(Features‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ "‪ "Features‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﲢﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SYSTEM MENU‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"SETUP‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Features‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﲈ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﴩﻳﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ"‪ "Auto Chapter‬ﺇﱃ "‪ "On‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ DV‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(VR‬‬
‫‪) Parental Control‬ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﳌﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﳍﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Features‬ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﲢﺘﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Parental Control‬ﰲ "‪ ،"Features‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﴪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Features - Parental Control‬‬
‫‪SETUP‬‬
‫‪Auto Chapter :‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Parental Control‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫‪One Touch Dubbing‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Record to HDD‬‬
‫‪Synchro Rec‬‬
‫‪Features‬‬
‫‪HQ‬‬
‫‪HQ Setting‬‬
‫‪Options‬‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪Colour System‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Screen Saver‬‬
‫‪Enter a new password.‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪Easy Setup‬‬
‫‪Auto Chapter‬‬
‫‪Features - Parental Control‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ﺇﱃ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،(VR‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﲆ ﻓﱰﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٦‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Enter your password.‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﴎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﴪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﴪ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪Features - Parental Control‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Level :‬‬
‫‪USA‬‬
‫‪Standard :‬‬
‫‪Password‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Standard‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ,‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪."Standard‬‬
‫‪Features - Parental Control‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Level :‬‬
‫‪USA‬‬
‫‪USA‬‬
‫‪Standard :‬‬
‫‪Others‬‬
‫‪Password‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲣﺘﺎﺭ "‪ ،"Others‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﰲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(١٠٨‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺧﱰ‬
‫"‪ "OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Level‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪."Level‬‬
‫‪) Finalize Disc‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﰲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٧٧‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪Manual‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Level :‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪Standard :‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪Password‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﲈ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﲈ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺃﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻒ ﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺃﻋﲆ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Level‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫"‪ "Off‬ﰲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.6‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﴪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Password‬ﰲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،3‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ .ENTER‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﴪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫ﴎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "OK‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﴪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻀﻄﺮ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫"‪ "Parental Control‬ﰲ "‪ "Factory Setup‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪) "Options‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩٢‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﳎﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﴪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻏﲑ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫‪Record to‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪Record to‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪HDD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪) HQ Setting‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ HQ‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪) HDD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٧‬‬
‫‪HQ+‬‬
‫‪HQ‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﲆ )‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ ‪HQ‬‬
‫‪Colour System‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪VIDEO CD‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪PAL‬‬
‫‪NTSC‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪PAL‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪NTSC‬‬
‫‪Screen Saver‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻃﻴﻒ(‪.‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Synchro Rec‬‬
‫‪Features - Parental Control‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪One Touch Dubbing‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪(Options‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ "‪ "Options‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SYSTEM MENU‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"SETUP‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Options‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Options‬ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﲢﺘﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪SETUP‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪Format DVD-RW :‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Main‬‬
‫‪HDD Bilingual Rec. :‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫‪Main‬‬
‫‪DVD Bilingual Rec. :‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫‪Dimmer :‬‬
‫‪Features‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Power Save :‬‬
‫‪Options‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Auto Display :‬‬
‫‪DVD3‬‬
‫‪Command Mode :‬‬
‫‪Easy Setup‬‬
‫‪Factory Setup‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.VR‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DVD Bilingual Rec.‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﰲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﴐﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (VR‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Main‬‬
‫‪Sub‬‬
‫‪Main‬‬
‫‪Sub‬‬
‫‪Main+Sub‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪Dimmer‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫‪Power‬‬
‫‪Save‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Power Save‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Options‬ﺇﱃ "‪ ،"On‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﴫﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Power Save‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪) HDD Bilingual Rec.‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.HDD‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪) Format DVD-RW‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD-RW‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﲈ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD-RW‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ ،HDD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ )‪(DVD‬‬
‫ﺑﴫﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﰲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪ "Power Save‬ﺇﱃ "‪."On‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪Auto Display‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ DISPLAY‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪Command Mode‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬
‫‪ Command Mode‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪ Sony‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ « Sony DVD‬ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٠‬‬
‫‪DVD1‬‬
‫‪DVD2‬‬
‫‪DVD3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ "‪."Easy Setup‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SYSTEM MENU‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"SETUP‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Easy Setup‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﳼ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪SETUP‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Video‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﳼ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Features‬‬
‫‪Options‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﳼ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Factory Setup‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Factory Setup‬ﰲ "‪ ،"Options‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ,‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ ،"Start‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﲥﺎ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ "‪،"Audio" ،"Video" ،"Settings‬‬
‫"‪ "Parental Control" ،"Options" ،"Features‬ﻭ‬
‫"‪ ،"All‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ,‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ "‪."Finish‬‬
‫‪Easy Setup‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪Easy Setup‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ "‪."Start‬‬
‫ﺇﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ "‪) "Easy Setup‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (٢١‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺿﻄﺮﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫<‬
‫ﲢﺮﻱ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﲢﺮﻱ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻠﺖ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺘﴩ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪Sony‬‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫< ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻻﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳ ﹰﺎ ﰲ "‪ "Channel Setting‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪) "Settings‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٠‬‬
‫< ﺇﺧﱰ ﺍﳌﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،INPUT SELECT‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺧﱰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ –‪.PROG +/‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﱃ "‪ ("VCR‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ NTSC‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪ ,‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﳊﻈﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫<‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺮﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﱃ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﺎﴍﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)ﻳﻀﺊ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ‪ (PROGRESSIVE‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻﻳﻘﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ PROGRESSIVE‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ‪.PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪ ،(525p/625p‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ‪ PROGRESSIVE‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﺍﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺿﻄﺮﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫‪ ،HDD‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪،HDD‬‬
‫ﻭﻻﻳﻌﺘﱪ ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪ ,‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﳊﻈﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﹰﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﳎﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RF‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ AERIAL OUT‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪.AERIAL IN‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻠﻐﺎﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٣‬‬
‫< ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻻﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ ،LINE IN 1‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "L1‬ﰲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ –‪ PROG +/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.INPUT SELECT‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ ،LINE 2 IN‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "L2‬ﰲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ –‪ PROG +/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.INPUT SELECT‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ ،LINE IN 3‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "L3‬ﰲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ –‪ PROG +/‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.INPUT SELECT‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪) ،DV IN‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "DV‬ﰲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ –‪ PROG +/‬ﺃﻭ ‪.INPUT SELECT‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺮﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪،DVD‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﴍﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﲤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "TV Type‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Video‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﲤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ‬
‫"‪ "TV Type‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪."Video‬‬
‫< ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻻﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻏﲑ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﴘ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﴪﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺊ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﲣﺮﺝ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪ OPTICAL) DIGITAL OUT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(COAXIAL‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ "‪ "Audio Connection‬ﰲ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪"Audio‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫ﳛﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Audio ATT‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Audio‬ﺇﱃ "‪"On‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻔﻌﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ ‪ CD‬ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ ،DTS‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪LINE OUT R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Audio DRC‬ﰲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Audio‬ﺇﱃ "‪) "TV Mode‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫< ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Audio ATT‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Audio‬ﺇﱃ "‪"Off‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫< ﺗﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ‪) TVS‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﲇ‬
‫ﳉﻬﺎﺯﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﰐ ﺑﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫< ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪"Line Audio Input‬‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺇﱃ "‪) "Bilingual‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫< ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ( ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،DVD+RW‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD+R‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪.DVD-R‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﱰ "‪ "Main‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "Sub‬ﰲ‬
‫"‪ "DVD Bilingual Rec.‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Options‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٩١‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(VR‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫< ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻏﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (VR‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ ،HDD‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪ "HDD Bilingual Rec.‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Options‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫"‪) "Main + Sub‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫< ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪ OPTICAL) DIGITAL OUT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (COAXIAL‬ﻭﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﰲ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Dolby Digital‬ﰲ‬
‫"‪ "Audio Connection‬ﰲ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Audio‬ﺇﱃ "‪"D-PCM‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻻﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪(HDD‬‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﲡﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﻋﲆ‪.‬‬
‫ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﻠﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺇﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳌﺪﺓ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲡﻬﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫< ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻗﺪ ﻻﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﲈﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫< ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﳏﻈﻮﺭ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫< ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﲢﻈﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﱰﲨﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫" ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﲢﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﻻﻳﻈﻬﺮ"‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﲢﻈﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺇﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫< ﺃﻧﺖ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﲠﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﳍﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﱃ‪ .‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪.MP3‬‬
‫< ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD VIDEO‬ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﲠﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ MP3‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻻﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺊ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٨‬‬
‫< ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ HDD‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫‪ HDD‬ﳑﺘﻠﺊ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﲑ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﱄ » ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ «‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﴍﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪.z REC‬‬
‫< ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻔﺎﺀ "‪"FORMAT" ،"LOAD‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ "‪ "INFOWRITE‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺊ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ « ﰲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻣﻦ ﳐﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻠﺖ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﻊ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪.DV‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﴍﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪.x REC STOP‬‬
‫< ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪.x‬‬
‫< ﺇﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ‪.x REC STOP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﳌﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٤‬‬
‫< ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻠﺖ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻣﻊ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫< ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻏﲑ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﳏﻮ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﳏﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Auto Title Erase‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) TOOLS‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ( ﺇﱃ "‪"On‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫< ﺗﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺷﺊ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺃﻧﺖ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻭﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫< ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ SYNCHRO REC‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ‪ SYNCHRO REC‬ﻣﻀﺊ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫< ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻏﲑ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫< ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﲣﻄﺖ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫< ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٤‬‬
‫< ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻔﱰﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺒﲔ ‪ TIMER REC‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﲠﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﲑ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﲑ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﲇ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ SLP‬ﻭ ‪ ،SEP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﲑ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻻﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Dimmer‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Options‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫"‪) "Power Save‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫< ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪ "Power Save‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ "‪ "Options‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫"‪ ،"On‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫<‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺻﻨﻊ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﱃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﱃ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(٢٠‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﳼ‬
‫ﳍﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻫﻲ ‪.DVD3‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ TV/DVD‬ﺇﱃ ‪) DVD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(١٩‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻻﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ "/1‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﳌﺪﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪ "WELCOME‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﱰﻛﻪ ﻓﱰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﲬﺴﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﰲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩٨‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪) Z‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﻏﻠﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫< ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﱃ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪"TRAY LOCKED‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺇﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Sony‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Sony‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﳏﲇ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Sony‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪ "RECOVERY‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻷﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﲣﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪ "RECOVERY‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪ "HDD ERROR‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ "/1‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﳌﺪﺓ ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪ "WELCOME‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﳛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫‪ HDD‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ HDD‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﳌﺪﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪ "FORMAT‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﳏﻮ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪ .HDD‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﳛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪ "FAN ERROR‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫< ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳉﻬﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻏﲑ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ‪ ،‬ﺇﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺗﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﳌﺪﺓ ﻗﺼﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ "/1‬ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻭﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ‪) Z‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﻏﻠﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫< ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ‪ (.‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ A‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺇﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ‪ "/1‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﳌﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪"WELCOME‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "‪ "LOCKED‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ ) ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪/‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﲬﺲ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪(C 13 00‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪C 13‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪.HDD‬‬
‫< ﺇﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﳏﲇ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﲈﺵ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪C 31‬‬
‫‪E XX‬‬
‫)‪ xx‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ(‬
‫ﱂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD/CD‬‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﰐ‪.‬‬
‫< ﺇﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Sony‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Sony‬ﳏﲇ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺑﻠﻐﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﲬﺲ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪E 61 10 :‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﱃ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﻣﺒﺎﴍﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﰲ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﳌﺪﺓ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﺮﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﱂ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﲈﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﲈﻉ ﺇﱃ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﲈﺵ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳊﺎﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﲢﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺼﲈﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﳋﺪﻭﺵ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﲔ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﱰﻛﻬﺎ ﰲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﺓ ﲢﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﴍﺓ ﻷﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﰲ ﻋﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻘﲈﺷﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫• ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﰲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺷﺎﺵ ﺍﳌﻀﺎﺩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ ‪.LP‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﳍﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻏﲑ ﻗﻴﺎﳼ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻠﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫– ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﲠﺎ ﴍﻳﻂ ﺳﻴﻠﻮﻓﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﴬﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﱃ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ؛ ﻻﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ )ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﳏﻮ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ )ﺑﲈ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﲔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺷﺒﻪ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪(L ،I ،D/K ،B/G) SECAM/PAL‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ E2 :VHF‬ﺇﱃ ‪ R1 ،E12‬ﺇﱃ ‪ F2 ،R12‬ﺇﱃ ‪،F10‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ ‪ A‬ﺇﱃ ‪ ،H‬ﺃﻳﺮﻟﻨﺪﺍ ‪ A‬ﺇﱃ ‪ ،J‬ﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺃﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ‪ 4‬ﺇﱃ ‪/13‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ E21 :UHF‬ﺇﱃ ‪ R21 ،E69‬ﺇﱃ ‪ B21 ،R69‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫‪ F21 ،B69‬ﺇﱃ ‪/F69‬ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ S01 :CATV‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫‪ S1 ،S05‬ﺇﱃ ‪ ،S20‬ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ ‪ B‬ﺇﱃ ‪ S21 :HYPER/Q‬ﺇﱃ‬
‫‪S41‬‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ » ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﳍﺎ «‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٨١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﲈﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﻄﻨﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻢ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻻﲤﺎﺛﲇ ‪ ٧٥‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﻛﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‪/‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ )ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‪/‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪MPEG‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 2 Dolby Digital‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪ ٢٥٦/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﻴﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﳋﺮﺝ‬
‫‪LINE OUT‬‬
‫)‪ :(AUDIO‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ‪ ١٠/Vrms ٢/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫)‪ :(VIDEO‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ‪ ١٫٠/‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪p-p‬‬
‫)‪ :(S VIDEO‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ ٤ DIN‬ﺷﻮﻛﺔ ﺻﻐﲑ‪ ١٫٠:Y/‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪،p-p‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٣ :C‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪(PAL) p-p‬‬
‫‪LINE IN 1/2/3‬‬
‫)‪ :(AUDIO‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ‪/Vrms ٢/‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٢‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫)‪ :(VIDEO‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ‪ ١٫٠/‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪p-p‬‬
‫)‪ :(S VIDEO‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ ٤ DIN‬ﺷﻮﻛﺔ ﺻﻐﲑ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ١٫٠ :Y‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ ٠٫٣ :C ،p-p‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪(PAL) p-p‬‬
‫‪ :DV IN‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ ٤‬ﺷﻮﻛﺔ‪i.LINK S100/‬‬
‫‪ :(OPTICAL) DIGITAL OUT‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﴫﻱ‪/‬‬
‫‪) dBm ١٨‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﺔ‪ ٦٦٠ :‬ﻧﺎﻧﻮﻣﱰ(‬‫‪ :(COAXIAL) DIGITAL OUT‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ ٧٥/p-p‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪:(PR/CR ،PB/CB ،Y) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻮﻧﻮ‪ ١٫٠ :Y/‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪،p-p‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٧ :PB/CB‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ ٠٫٧ :PR/CR ،p-p‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪p-p‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪ ٢٢٠ – ٢٤٠ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﱰﺩﺩ‪ ٥٠/٦٠ ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ٥١ :RDR-HX710‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ٥٥ :RDR-HX910‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‪ ٣٢٨ × ٧٥ × ٤٣٠ :‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ١٦٠ :RDR-HX710‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ٢٥٠ :RDR-HX910‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ﹰﺎ(‪ ٥٫٠ :‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ٥ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﱃ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ %٢٥ :‬ﺇﱃ ‪%٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪(١‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ )‪(١‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪(١‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﲢﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪(١‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪) R6‬ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(٢) (AA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﲑ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ PAL‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ PAL‬ﺃﻭ ‪.NTSC‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ SECAM‬ﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ PAL‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﲈﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﲆ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮ￯‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ‪i.LINK‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ DV IN‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪ DV IN‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ .i.LINK‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪i.LINK‬‬
‫ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ‪i.LINK‬؟‬
‫‪ i.LINK‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﰲ ﺇﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﺑﲔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪ ،i.LINK‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ i.LINK‬ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪i.LINK‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﱃ ﺇﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ i.LINK‬ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻞ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﴍﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺮﺟﻲ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﲣﺘﻠﻒ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫ﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﰲ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﺧﺮ￯ ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ "‪"i.LINK‬‬
‫‪ i.LINK‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻴﻮﻋ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ IEEE 1394‬ﺍﳌﻘﱰﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ ،SONY‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﱰﻑ‬
‫ﲠﺎ ﻣﻦ ﴍﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ IEEE 1394 .‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ﻋﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻬﺪ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﳼ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﻜﱰﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻗﴡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ i.LINK‬ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻗﺼﻮ￯ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪) S100‬ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪(*Mbps ١٠٠‬‬
‫‪) S200‬ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪(Mbps ٢٠٠‬‬
‫‪) S400‬ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪(Mbps ٤٠٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﲢﺖ » ﺍﳌﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ « ﰲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻛﲈ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ i.LINK‬ﻋﲆ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﴡ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﻮ "‪."S100‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻗﴡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻮﺩ ﳐﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﳜﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ‪Mbps‬؟‬
‫‪ Mbps‬ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﺖ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﳍﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﳍﺎ ﰲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪ Mbps ١٠٠‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ i.LINK‬ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪ ،DV‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٧٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ DV‬ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ .DVC-SD‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ DV‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ MICRO MV‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫‪ MICRO MV‬ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪.i.LINK‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ￯‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﰲ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٧٥‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺇﲣﺎﺫﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ b‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﱃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪) i.LINK‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪ .(DV‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﺇﱃ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ i.LINK‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺒﺴﲔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ‪) i.LINK‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪،(DV‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳌﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻮﺩ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﴎﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬
‫‪i.LINK‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ i.LINK‬ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ٤ i.LINK‬ﺷﻮﻛﺔ ﺇﱃ ‪ ٤‬ﺷﻮﻛﺔ ‪) Sony‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪.(DV‬‬
‫‪ i.LINK‬ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﲡﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪(١٨) TV/DVD‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺯﺭ ‪) Z‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﻏﻠﻖ( )‪(٢٥‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺯﺭ ‪) */1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( )‪(٢١‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٢٧) HDD‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪(٢٥) DVD‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ –‪) PROG +/‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ( )‪(٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ +‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ *‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪(٥٦ ،٤١‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪(٤١) SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 5‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ *‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ –‪) 2 +/‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮ￯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( )‪(١٨‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺯﺭ ‪) CLEAR/-/--‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﴩﺓ( )‪(٤١‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺯﺭ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ( )‪(٥١‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﲨﺔ( )‪(٥١‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺕ( ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ *‪.‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٧٥ ،٤٧) INPUT SELECT‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪(١٨) t TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫‪ qa‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٣١) DISPLAY‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪(٣١) TIME/TEXT‬‬
‫‪ qs‬ﺯﺭ ]‪(٤١ ،٣٩) [TIMER‬‬
‫‪ qd‬ﺯﺭ ‪) SUR‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ( )‪(٥١‬‬
‫‪ qf‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٨٠ ،٧٨) SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪(٦٣ ،٥٨ ،٤٩ ،٢٨) TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪(٤٤) TIMER LIST‬‬
‫‪ qg‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٤٩) TOP MENU‬‬
‫‪ qh‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٤٩) MENU‬‬
‫‪ qj‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٢١) ENTER/</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ qk‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٤٤) O RETURN‬‬
‫‪ ql‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٢٥) TOOLS‬‬
‫;‪ w‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫)‪(٥٨ ،٢٨‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ(‪/‬‬
‫)ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ(‬
‫‪ wa‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪) ./‬ﺗﺎﱄ‪/‬ﺳﺎﺑﻖ( )‪(٥١‬‬
‫‪ ws‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪CM‬‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪) mc‬ﺑﺤﺚ( )‪(٥١‬‬
‫‪ wd‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٥٦) VISUAL SEARCH‬‬
‫‪ wf‬ﺯﺭ ‪) H‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )‪(٤٩‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) X‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ( )‪(٥١‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) x‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪(٤٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ H‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ *‪.‬‬
‫‪ wg‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٢٧) z REC‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪(٢٧) X REC PAUSE‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪(٢٧) x REC STOP‬‬
‫‪ wh‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٢٧) REC MODE‬‬
‫‪ wj‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪/CHAPTER MARK‬‬
‫‪(٦٧) CHAPTER MARK ERASE‬‬
‫‪ wk‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٤٦) SYNCHRO REC‬‬
‫‪ wl‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫;‪ e‬ﺯﺭ‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ( )‪(١٨‬‬
‫)ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ( )‪(٥١‬‬
‫‪ ea‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪(DVD 1,2,3) COMMAND MODE‬‬
‫)‪(٢٠‬‬
‫‪ es‬ﺯﺭ ‪(١٥) PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫* ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺯﺭ ‪) @/1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( )‪(٢١‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )‪(١٠٥ ،٣٢‬‬
‫‪ qa‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٧٧) ONE-TOUCH DUB‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺒﲔ ‪(٣٩) TIMER REC‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﲔ ‪(٤٦) SYNCHRO REC‬‬
‫‪ qd‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٢٥) TOOLS‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺻﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ )‪(٢٥‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺯﺭ ‪) A‬ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﻏﻠﻖ( )‪(٢٥‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺯﺭ‪/‬ﻣﺒﲔ ‪(٢٧) HDD‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ‪/‬ﻣﺒﲔ ‪(٢٥) DVD‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( )‪(١٨‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺯﺭ ‪) H‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )‪(٤٩‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) X‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ( )‪(٥١‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) x‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( )‪(٤٩‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٢٧) REC z‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪(٢٧) REC PAUSE X‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪(٢٧) REC STOP x‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪(٧٥) DV IN‬‬
‫‪ qs‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٨٠ ،٧٨) SYSTEM MENU‬‬
‫‪ qf‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٢١) ENTER /</M/m/,‬‬
‫‪ qg‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٤٤) RETURN O‬‬
‫‪ qh‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪) ./‬ﺗﺎﱄ‪/‬ﺳﺎﺑﻖ( )‪(٥١‬‬
‫‪ qj‬ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ –‪(٢٧) PROGRAM +/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ +‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ *‪.‬‬
‫‪ qk‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٧٥ ،٤٧) INPUT SELECT‬‬
‫‪ ql‬ﺯﺭ ‪(٣٧) REC MODE‬‬
‫;‪ w‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪LINE 2 IN‬‬
‫)‪(L(MONO) AUDIO R/VIDEO/S VIDEO‬‬
‫)‪(٢٢‬‬
‫* ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪VCD‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪DVD RW‬‬
‫‪VR‬‬
‫‪HDD‬‬
‫‪DVD‬‬
‫‪PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎﻳﲇ )‪:(٣٢‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺎﺕ ‪HDD/DVD‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳌﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫• ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﳊﺎﱄ‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺒﲔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ*‪/‬ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺒﲔ ‪(٣٨) NICAM‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(٣١‬‬
‫)ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ( )‪(٥١‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺒﲔ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺒﲔ ‪(١٥) PROGRESSIVE‬‬
‫* ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DATA CD‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ "‪."CD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪COMPONENT‬‬
‫‪VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪LINE IN‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪LINE OUT‬‬
‫‪PB/CB‬‬
‫‪~ AC IN‬‬
‫‪PR/CR‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪(١٣) AERIAL IN/OUT‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫)‪(١٤) (PR/CR ،PB/CB ،Y‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﻑ ‪(١٧) AC IN‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪(١٤) (S VIDEO) LINE OUT‬‬
‫‪S VIDEO‬‬
‫‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪R-AUDIO-L‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ z‬ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ "‪ "Dimmer‬ﺇﱃ "‪ "Power Save‬ﰲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪"Options‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫‪AERIAL‬‬
‫‪IN‬‬
‫‪PCM/DTS/MPEG/‬‬
‫‪DOLBY DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪(R-AUDIO-L/VIDEO) LINE OUT‬‬
‫)‪(١٦ ،١٤‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪(٢٢) (S VIDEO) LINE 1/3‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪(VIDEO/R-AUDIO-L) LINE IN 1/3‬‬
‫)‪(٢٢‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪DIGITAL OUT‬‬
‫)‪(١٦) (OPTICAL/COAXIAL‬‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD+R‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨‬‬
‫‪) DVD+R‬ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ » ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ‪ (« R‬ﻫﻲ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ .DVD VIDEO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD+R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﳍﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD+RW‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨‬‬
‫‪) DVD+RW‬ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ » ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ‪ (« RW‬ﻫﻲ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-R‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨‬‬
‫‪ DVD-R‬ﻫﻲ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ .DVD VIDEO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD-R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﳍﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪.DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨‬‬
‫‪ DVD-RW‬ﻫﻲ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ .DVD VIDEO‬ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD-RW‬ﳍﺎ ﻭﺿﻌﺎﻥ ﳐﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ VR‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺖ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳍﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ ،DVD VIDEO‬ﺑﻴﻨﲈ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﺖ ﰲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪) VR‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﱪﳎﺔ ﺍﻭ ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪) DVD VIDEO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٠‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﲆ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺪﲥﺎ ﺇﱃ ‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻜﻤﺔ ‪ .CD‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻲ ‪) GB ٤٫٧‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﻴﺖ(‬
‫ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٧‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﳌﺤﻜﻤﺔ ‪ .CD‬ﻛﲈ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ ، GB ٨٫٥‬ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬
‫‪ GB ٩٫٤‬ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﻭﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬
‫‪.GB ١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ MPEG 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﱃ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﱄ ‪) ١/٤٠‬ﰲ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﲇ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺃﻳﻀ ﹰﺎ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﲑﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﲑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﲣﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘ ﹰﺎ ﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻴﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﱪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﲆ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﲢﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﲈﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻲ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﲇ ‪) Original‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻴ ﹰﺎ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪/HDD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .(VR‬ﳏﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﱃ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪) Dolby Digital‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﴍﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ .Dolby Laboratories‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﳌﺠﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ Dolby Digital‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﰲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﲈﺋﻲ‬
‫"‪."Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺇﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳛﺪﺙ ﺇﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻷﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪) DTS‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﴍﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ .Digital Theater Systems, Inc.‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﱰﻳﻮ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﳌﺠﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﱰﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﰲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ DTS‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺇﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳛﺪﺙ ﺇﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻷﻥ ﲨﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪) MPEG‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٨٨‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﲑ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﳼ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﴫﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ ،ISO/IEC. MPEG 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﱃ ‪ ٧٫١‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ ‪) Interlace format‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ ﺗﺒﲔ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﲆ ﺷﻜﻞ » ﳎﺎﻝ « ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﱪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﳌﺠﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳌﺠﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪) Progressive format‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(١٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﲔ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﳎﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﳊﺎﻝ ﻛﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ ‪ ٣٠-٢٥‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ٦٠-٥٠/‬ﳎﺎﻝ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﻛﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺣ ﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪،DVD‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ ﰲ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﰲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺻﻮﰐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻌ ﹰﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪/CD‬ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫‪) VIDEO CD‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪/HDD‬ﺍﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .(VR‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﱰﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﲈ ﻫﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﴬﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺻﻐﲑ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺁﱄ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺋﺢ ﺻﻠﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻐﻨﻄﻴﴘ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﳌﻐﻨﻄﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﲆ ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﲑﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﯽ ﴎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬
.٨٥ ‫ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬،‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
.‫ ﻗﻴﺎﳼ‬ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) ‫ﲥﺠﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
Samoan 1507
Shona 1508
Somali 1509
Albanian 1511
Serbian 1512
Siswati 1513
Sesotho 1514
Sundanese 1515
Swedish 1516
Swahili 1517
Tamil 1521
Telugu 1525
Tajik 1527
Thai 1528
Tigrinya 1529
Turkmen 1531
Tagalog 1532
Setswana 1534
Tonga 1535
Turkish 1538
Tsonga 1539
Tatar 1540
Twi 1543
Ukrainian 1557
Urdu 1564
Uzbek 1572
Vietnamese 1581
Volap k 1587
Wolof 1613
Xhosa 1632
Yoruba 1665
Chinese 1684
Zulu 1697
Maori 1347
Macedonian 1349
Malayalam 1350
Mongolian 1352
Moldavian 1353
Marathi 1356
Malay 1357
Maltese 1358
Burmese 1363
Nauru 1365
Nepali 1369
Dutch 1376
Norwegian 1379
Occitan 1393
(Afan)Oromo 1403
Oriya 1408
Punjabi 1417
Polish 1428
Pashto; 1435
Pushto
Portuguese 1436
Quechua 1463
Rhaeto- 1481
Romance
Kirundi 1482
Romanian 1483
Russian 1489
Kinyarwanda 1491
Sanskrit 1495
Sindhi 1498
Sangho 1501
Serbo- 1502
Croatian
Singhalese 1503
Slovak 1505
Slovenian 1506
Irish 1183
Scots Gaelic 1186
Galician 1194
Guarani 1196
Gujarati 1203
Hausa 1209
Hindi 1217
Croatian 1226
Hungarian 1229
Armenian 1233
Interlingua 1235
Interlingue 1239
Inupiak 1245
Indonesian 1248
Icelandic 1253
Italian 1254
Hebrew 1257
Japanese 1261
Yiddish 1269
Javanese 1283
Georgian 1287
Kazakh 1297
Greenlandic 1298
Cambodian 1299
Kannada 1300
Korean 1301
Kashmiri 1305
Kurdish 1307
Kirghiz 1311
Latin 1313
Lingala 1326
Laothian 1327
Lithuanian 1332
Latvian; 1334
Lettish
Malagasy 1345
Afar 1027
Abkhazian 1028
Afrikaans 1032
Amharic 1039
Arabic 1044
Assamese 1045
Aymara 1051
Azerbaijani 1052
Bashkir 1053
Byelorussian 1057
Bulgarian 1059
Bihari 1060
Bislama 1061
Bengali; 1066
Bangla
Tibetan 1067
Breton 1070
Catalan 1079
Corsican 1093
Czech 1097
Welsh 1103
Danish 1105
German 1109
Bhutani 1130
Greek 1142
English 1144
Esperanto 1145
Spanish 1149
Estonian 1150
Basque 1151
Persian 1157
Finnish 1165
Fiji 1166
Faroese 1171
French 1174
Frisian 1181
‫ ﻏﲑ ﳏﺪﺩﺓ‬1703
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
.٨٩ ‫ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬،‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﴪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻼﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
2149
2499
2086
2528
2184
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻫﻮﻟﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻼﻧﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺮﻭﻳﺞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺴﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﲔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﱪﺗﻐﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻨﻐﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ‬
2362
2376
2390
2379
2427
2424
2436
2489
2501
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻠﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬
‫ﺃﳌﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﳍﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻄﺎﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﻴﺰﻳﺎ‬
2165
2174
2109
2248
2238
2254
2276
2304
2363
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻨﺘﲔ‬2044
‫ ﺃﺳﱰﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬2047
‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺴﺎ‬2046
‫ ﺑﻠﺠﻴﻜﺎ‬2057
‫ ﺍﻟﱪﺍﺯﻳﻞ‬2070
‫ ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬2079
‫ ﺗﺸﻴﲇ‬2090
‫ ﺍﻟﺼﲔ‬2092
‫ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﲈﺭﻙ‬2115
١٠٨
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﲈﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﰲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٨٥ ،٢١ 16:9‬‬
‫‪٨٥ ،٢١ 4:3 Letter Box‬‬
‫‪٨٥ ،٢١ 4:3 Pan Scan‬‬
‫"‪٨٨ "48kHz/96kHz PCM‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ‪٦١ ،٣١‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ‪١٠ ،٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﳏﻜﻤﺔ ‪١٠ CD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪١٠ VIDEO CD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪١٠ DATA CD‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪١٠٦ ،١٠ DVD VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪١٠٦ ،٨ DVD+R‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪١٠٦ ،٨ DVD+RW‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪١٠٦ ،٨ DVD-R‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪١٠٦ ،٨ DVD-RW‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪DVD-RW‬‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪ VIDEO CD‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪٩١ ،٦٦ ،٣٤ ،٢٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ‪INPUT SELECT‬‬
‫‪٧٦ ،٤٧‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪٤١ ،٣٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﲇ ‪١٠٦ ،٦٢ ،٢٩‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ‬
‫‪٢٧ REC PAUSE‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٧٧ REC STOP‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ‪٩٨ RECOVERY‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺠﻞ ‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﹰﺎ ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﴎﻳﻊ‪/‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﴎﻳﻊ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺭ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﳍﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪١٦‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪٨ CPRM‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ‪٦٧ ،٦٢‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٧٥ DV‬‬
‫ﲡﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳖﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٣٦ ،٣٥‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﲡﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻃﺎﺭ ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ‪٨٩ ،٥٠‬‬
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﰲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٤٩ PBC‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٥٢ ،٥١ ،٤٩ ،٣١ ،١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﴎﻳﻊ ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﴎﻳﻊ ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﲡﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻃﺎﺭ ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪٥٨ JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪٥٨ MP3‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﺊ ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٢٧ REC‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٨٩ ،٤٦ ،٣٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٣٧ ،٢٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٢٨‬‬
‫"‪٣٩ "Update‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﲢﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪١٠٢ ،١٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﰲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﲨﺔ ‪٨٥ ،٥١‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻴﺘﻜﺴﺖ )‪٨٣ ،٢٧ (Teletext‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪٤١ G‬‬
‫ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ ‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻱ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﻴﺖ ‪٢٦ GB‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٥٣ ،٤٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﲪﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﲪﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪COMPONENT VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪٦٦‬‬
‫< ﻳﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﻟﺒﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪١٠٦ ،٨٨ ،١٦‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ‪٧٥ DV IN‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ‪٢٣ LINE 2 IN‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪٢٢ LINE IN 3‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﴎﻳﻊ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪٨‬‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻬﻞ ‪٩٢ ،٢١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪٣٤ ،١٩ SET‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫‪i‬ﳏﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫‪CHAPTER MARK ERASE‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪١١‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫‪٦٧ CHAPTER MARK‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﲆ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ "‪"OSD‬‬
‫‪٨٥، ٢١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ‪٥٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪١٠٧ ،٣١‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﲑ‪/‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﲥﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ( ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪٥٨ JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪٥٨ MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﴎﻳﻊ ‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪٣٩ TIMER‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪١٨ TV/DVD‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪١٦‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪٨٤ ،٢١‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪١٠٥ ،٣٢‬‬
‫ﴍﻳﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪٨٧ ،٥١‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪١٠٦ ،٨٨ DTS‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪١٠٧ ،٨٨ MPEG‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪٨١ ،٣٨ NICAM‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪) TVS‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﲣﻴﲇ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻜﺔ ‪١٠٧ ،١٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪١٠٧ ،١٥‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺽ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ‪١٠٦ ،٦٧ ،٤٣ ،٣١‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ‪١٤ S VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ‪٣٨‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ‪٤٩ DVD‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻮﻳﺔ ‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٠٧ ،٦٧ ،٦٢ ،٢٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻫﺪ ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٤٩ TITLE LIST‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٤٩ ،٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻮﻳﺔ ‪٤٩ TOP MENU‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪٧١‬‬
‫"‪٧٠ "Dub Mode‬‬
‫"‪٧٤ "Settings‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٧٥ DV‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪٩٠ ،٧٧‬‬
‫ﲢﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪٩٠ ،٧٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻮﺍﻟﻒ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪٢٧ TV/VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪٣٨ ZWEITON‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﲑﺍ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﻩ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٤٩ MENU‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪١٣‬‬
٩١ "Power Save"
٧٩ ،٦٨ "Preview"
٨٦ "Progressive Mode"
٦٣ "Protect"
٣٥ "Protect Disc"
٤٢ "Rec Mode"
٤٣ "Rec NR"
٤٢ "Rec Settings"
٤٣ "Rec Video Equalizer"
٥٧ "Search"
٦٤ "Set Thumbnail"
٨٠ "Settings"
٨٣ "Station Name"
٧٦ "Stereo1"
٧٦ "Stereo2"
٨٠ "System"
٥٧ "Time Search"
٦٤"Title Name"
٥٧ "Title Search"
٥٧ "Track Search"
٨٣ "TV Guide Page"
٨٥ ،٢١ "TV Type"
٣٦ "Unfinalize"
٨٥ "Video"
٥٣ "Video Settings"
٥٣ "Y NR"
١١١
٦٧ "Create Playlist"
٨٨ "Digital Out"
٩١ "Dimmer"
٦٦ ،٣٤ ،٢٥ "Disc Info"
٦٥ "Divide"
٨٧ "Downmix"
٧٩ ،٧٠ "Dub Mode"
٧٦ "DV Audio Input"
٧٨ "DV EDIT"
٩١ "DVD Bilingual Rec."
٨٥ "DVD Menu"
٤٣ "DVD Rec. Picture Size"
٥٣ "DVE"
٧٩ ،٦٨ ،٦٣ ،٤٤ "Erase"
٦٦ "Erase All"
٦٥ "Erase Titles"
٤٠ "Extend Rec"
٩٢ "Factory Setup"
٨٩ "Features"
٥٧ "File Search"
٣٦ "Finalize"
٩٠ "Finalize Disc"
٢٥ "Format"
٩١ "Format DVD-RW"
٩١ "HDD Bilingual Rec"
٥٣ "Hue"
٤٧ ،٤٦ "Line Audio Input"
٨٦ "Line Input"
٨٦ "Line1 Input"
٨٧ "Line3 Input"
٧٦ "Mix"
٥٣ "MNR"
٤٤ "Modify"
٧٩ ،٦٨ "Move"
٨٠ "Normal"
٩١ "Options"
٨٦ "Pause Mode"
٥٣ "PB Video Equalizer"
٥٠ "Play Begining"
‫ﻭ‬
١٠١ i.LINK ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
٢٩ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
٣١ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
٣٧ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
٣١ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
٣٢ TIME/TEXT ‫ﻧﺺ‬/‫ﻭﻗﺖ‬
٨ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
٦٢ ،٨ VR ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
A-Z
٦٤ "A-B Erase"
٨١ "AFT"
٥٧ "Album Search"
٨٥ "Audio"
٢١ "Audio Connection"
٨٧ "Audio DRC"
٥٤ "Audio Filter"
٥٤ "Audio Settings"
٨٩ "Auto Chapter"
٩٢ "Auto Display"
٤٥ "Auto Title Erase"
٥٤ "AV SYNC"
٤٧ ،٤٦ "Bilingual"
٥٣ "BNR"
٥٣ ،٤٣ "Brightness"
٥٣ "C NR"
٦٧ "Capture"
٦٧ "Capture All"
٨٠ "CATV"
٧٩ ،٦٨ "Change IN"
٧٩ ،٦٨ "Change OUT"
٨٣ "Channel List"
٨٠ "Channel Setting"
٥٧ "Chapter Search"
٤٥ "Check Overlap"
٥٣ ،٤٣ "Colour"
٩٠ "Colour System"
٦٩ "Combine"
٩٢ ،٢٠ "Command Mode"
٥٣ ،٤٣ "Contrast"
‫ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻋﲆ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 100%‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﱪ ﳛﺘﻮ￯ ﻋﲆ ﺯﻳﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﰐ ﺧﺎﱄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪.(VOC‬‬
‫‪Sony Corporation Printed in Malaysia‬‬
Download PDF

advertising